Samsung Printer SCX 4520 User Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the User’s Guide  
This Laser MFP User’s Guide provides information you need for setting up your  
machine and installing the supplied software. It also provides all of the detailed  
instructions for using your machine as a printer, a scanner, a copier, and a facsimile,  
and information for maintaining and troubleshooting the machine. The User’s Guide  
shows you how to use a USB flash drive with your machine for scanning and saving  
documents, and printing documents stored on the USB flash drive.  
This guide also provides the basic description of the multi-function application,  
Samsung SmarThru. SmarThru allows you to scan and edit images and to scan for  
copying. SmarThru also lets you access scanned images that you can then email from  
your computer.  
This manual is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein  
is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any  
changes, direct or indirect, arising from or related to use of this manual.  
© 2004 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
• SCX-4520, SCX-4520S, SCX-4720F, SCX-4720FS and Samsung logo are  
trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
• Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.  
• IBM and IBM PC are trademarks of International Business Machines  
Corporation.  
• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard company.  
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows 9x, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT  
4.0, and Windows XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.  
• UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Agfa division of Bayer  
Corp.  
TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective  
companies or organizations.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD  
WIDE  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact  
the SAMSUNG customer care center.  
Country  
CANADA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
www.samsung.com/ca  
www.samsung.com/mx  
MEXICO  
01-800-SAMSUNG  
(7267864)  
U.S.A  
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
0800-333-3733  
0800-124-421  
www.samsung.com  
ARGENTINE  
BRAZIL  
www.samsung.com/ar  
www.samsung.com/br  
www.samsung.com/cl  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/latin  
CHILE  
800-726-7864 (SAMSUNG)  
0-800-507-7267  
1-800-10-7267  
COSTA RICA  
ECUADOR  
EL SALVADOR  
GUATEMALA  
JAMAICA  
800-6225  
1-800-299-0013  
1-800-234-7267  
800-7267  
PANAMA  
PUERTO RICO  
1-800-682-3180  
1-800-751-2676  
REP.  
DOMINICA  
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-7267-864  
www.samsung.com/latin  
VENEZUELA  
BELGIUM  
1-800-100-5303  
02 201 2418  
www.samsung.com/latin  
www.samsung.com/be  
www.samsung.com/cz  
CZECH  
844 000 844  
REPUBLIC  
DENMARK  
FINLAND  
FRANCE  
38 322 887  
www.samsung.com/dk  
www.samsung.com/fi  
www.samsung.com/fr  
09 693 79 554  
08 25 08 65 65  
(€ 0,15/min)  
GERMANY  
01805 - 121213  
(€ 0,12/min)  
www.samsung.de  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Country  
HUNGARY  
Customer Care Center  
06 40 985 985  
Web Site  
www.samsung.com/hu  
www.samsung.com/it  
www.samsung.lu  
ITALIA  
199 153 153  
LUXEMBURG  
02 261 03 710  
NETHERLANDS 0900 20 200 88  
(€ 0,10/min)  
www.samsung.com/nl  
NORWAY  
POLAND  
PORTUGAL  
SLOVAKIA  
SPAIN  
231 627 22  
www.samsung.com/no  
www.samsung.com/pl  
www.samsung.com/pt  
www.samsung.com/sk  
www.samsung.com/es  
www.samsung.com/se  
www.samsung.com/uk  
www.samsung.ru  
0 801 801 881  
80 8 200 128  
0850 123 989  
902 10 11 30  
08 585 367 87  
0870 242 0303  
8-800-200-0400  
8-800-502-0000  
1300 362 603  
SWEDEN  
U.K  
RUSSIA  
UKRAINE  
AUSTRALIA  
CHINA  
www.samsung.com/ur  
www.samsung.com/au  
www.samsung.com.cn  
800-810-5858  
010- 6475 1880  
HONG KONG  
INDIA  
2862 6001  
www.samsung.com/hk  
www.samsung.com/in  
3030 8282  
1600 1100 11  
INDONESIA  
JAPAN  
0800-112-8888  
0120-327-527  
1800-88-9999  
www.samsung.com/id  
www.samsung.com/jp  
www.samsung.com/my  
www.samsung.com/ph  
MALAYSIA  
PHILIPPINES  
1800-10-SAMSUNG  
(7267864)  
SINGAPORE  
THAILAND  
1800-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
www.samsung.com/sg  
www.samsung.com/th  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
TAIWAN  
0800-329-999  
1 800 588 889  
www.samsung.com/tw  
www.samsung.com/vn  
www.samsung.com/za  
www.samsung.com/mea  
VIETNAM  
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)  
U.A.E 800SAMSUNG (7267864)  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Features ................................................................ 1.2  
Understanding Component Locations .................................... 1.5  
Front View .................................................................. 1.5  
Selecting a Location ..................................................... 2.4  
Repairing Software ........................................................... 2.34  
Removing Software .......................................................... 2.35  
Uninstalling the MFP Driver .......................................... 2.35  
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru .................................. 2.36  
Chapter 3: PAPER HANDLING  
Selecting Print Materials ..................................................... 3.2  
Paper Type, Input Sources, and Capacities ...................... 3.2  
Guidelines for Paper and Special Materials ....................... 3.3  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the Multipurpose Tray ............................................... 3.6  
Using the Manual Feed Mode ......................................... 3.8  
Selecting an Output Location ............................................. 3.10  
Using Overlays ................................................................ 4.21  
What is an Overlay? ................................................... 4.21  
Creating a New Page Overlay ....................................... 4.21  
Deleting a Page Overlay .............................................. 4.25  
Loading Paper for Copying .................................................. 5.2  
Collation Copying ....................................................... 5.10  
Auto Fit Copying ........................................................ 5.11  
2 Sides on 1 Page Copying .......................................... 5.11  
2 Up or 4 Up Copying ................................................. 5.12  
Poster Copying .......................................................... 5.13  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Default Settings ........................................... 5.14  
Setting the Time Out Option .............................................. 5.15  
Scanning From the Control Panel to an Application ................. 6.3  
About Network Scan ..................................................... 6.9  
Installing the Network Scan Program .............................. 6.9  
Setting Network Scan Timeout ..................................... 6.12  
Available Fax Setup Options ................................................ 7.3  
Selecting the Paper Tray ..................................................... 7.9  
Sending a Fax Automatically .............................................. 7.11  
Redialing the Last Number ................................................ 7.12  
Automatic Redialing ......................................................... 7.13  
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes ..................................... 7.15  
Receiving Manually in Tel Mode .......................................... 7.15  
Sending a Fax using a Speed Dial Number ..................... 7.22  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
(Multi-address Transmission) ....................................... 7.25  
Searching for a Number in Memory .................................... 7.26  
Searching Sequentially through the Memory .................. 7.26  
Searching with a Particular First Letter .......................... 7.26  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a Phonebook List .................................................. 7.27  
Sending a Delayed Fax ..................................................... 7.29  
Using Secure Receiving Mode ............................................ 7.35  
Printing Reports ............................................................... 7.36  
Using Advanced Fax Settings ............................................. 7.38  
Advanced Fax Setting Options ..................................... 7.39  
Cleaning the Inside ...................................................... 8.3  
Cleaning the Scan Unit .................................................. 8.5  
Consumables and Replacement Parts .................................. 8.13  
Replacing the ADF Rubber Pad ........................................... 8.14  
Setting E-mail Notification ................................................. 8.16  
Printing Quality Problems ............................................ 9.19  
Copying Problems ...................................................... 9.24  
Scanning Problems ..................................................... 9.25  
Fax Problems (SCX-4720F/4720FS Only) ....................... 9.26  
Common Linux Problems ............................................. 9.28  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(SCX-4720F/4720FS only) ........................................... 9.32  
Deleting an Image File ................................................ 10.7  
Formatting the USB Flash Drive ................................... 10.8  
Printing From the USB Flash Drive ..................................... 10.10  
Backing Up Data ............................................................. 10.11  
Printing a Document ......................................................... A.12  
Printing from Applications ........................................... A.12  
Printing Files ............................................................. A.13  
Using the Image Editor ............................................... A.17  
Repairing PostScript Drivers .......................................... B.4  
Removing PostScript Drivers .......................................... B.4  
Using PostScript Printer Driver Features ................................ B.5  
Accessing Printer Properties ........................................... B.5  
Printer Settings ............................................................ B.6  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a Document ........................................................... C.6  
Canceling a Print Job .................................................... C.7  
Scheduling a Print Job .................................................. C.8  
Setting Up a Locally-Shared Machine .................................... D.3  
In Windows 95/98/Me ................................................... D.3  
Installing Memory DIMM ..................................................... E.2  
Removing a Memory DIMM ............................................ E.5  
Installing a Network Interface Card ...................................... E.6  
Setting Tray 2 in the Printer Properties ......................... E.12  
Supported Sizes of Paper .............................................. F.7  
Guidelines for Using Paper ............................................. F.8  
Paper Specifications ..................................................... F.9  
Paper Output Capacity .................................................. F.9  
Paper Storage Environment ........................................... F.9  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Precautions and Safety Information  
When using this machine, these basic safety precautions should always be followed  
to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people:  
1. Read and understand all instructions.  
2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.  
3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature  
accompanying the machine.  
4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the  
safety information. You may have misunderstood the operating instruction. If you  
cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for  
assistance.  
5. Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before  
cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a damp cloth for  
cleaning.  
6. Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing  
serious damage.  
7. Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air  
conditioner or ventilation duct.  
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where  
the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.  
9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance,  
and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.  
10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.  
11. Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet  
openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating a risk of fire or  
shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.  
12. You machine may have a heavy cover for optimal pressure on the document for  
the best scanning and/or faxing (usually the flatbed-type machine). In this case,  
replace the cover after placing document on the scan glass, by holding and  
moving it down slowly until it seats on its location.  
13. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a  
qualified service technician when repair work is required. Opening or removing  
covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect  
reassembly could cause electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.  
14. Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer  
servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:  
• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or  
frayed.  
• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.  
• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.  
• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.  
• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.  
15. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and may require extensive  
work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.  
16. Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of  
electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the AC power and telephone cord  
for the duration of the lightning storm.  
17. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
18. Use only No.26 AWG or larger telephone line cord.  
Laser Safety Statement  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR,  
chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a  
Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and  
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a  
Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service  
condition.  
WARNING  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/  
Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ozone Safety  
Power Saver  
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The  
ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator.  
However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well  
ventilated area.  
If you need additional information about ozone, please request  
your nearest Samsung dealer.  
This machine contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power  
consumption when it is not in active use.  
When the machine does not receive data for an extended period of time, power  
consumption is automatically lowered.  
The energy star emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of any machine or  
service.  
Recycling  
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product  
in an environmentally responsible manner.  
Correct Disposal of This Product  
(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries  
with separate collection systems)  
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that  
it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end  
of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or  
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other  
types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of  
material resources.  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this  
product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take  
this item for environmentally safe recycling.  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of  
the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial  
wastes for disposal.  
Mercury Safety  
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE  
RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL  
LAWS. For details see lamprecycle.org, eiae.org, or call 1-800-Samsung.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio Frequency Emissions  
FCC Information to the User  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B  
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy  
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
CAUTION: Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer  
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions  
from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard  
entitled “Digital Apparatus, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux  
appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur:  
“Appareils Numériques, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.  
United States of America  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15  
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication  
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer  
system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the  
system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United  
States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the  
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include  
extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body  
when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices),  
which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set  
by the FCC.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other  
antenna or transmitter.  
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may  
not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any  
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use  
it. Contact manufacturer for service.  
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:  
“While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination  
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1mW/cm2 may be exceeded at  
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must  
maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This  
device can not be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting  
antenna.”  
Fax Branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to  
use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone  
facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or  
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following  
information:  
(1) the date and time of transmission  
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the  
message; and  
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or  
individual.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,  
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the  
operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC  
Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal  
equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or  
require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially  
affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing,  
to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may  
be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some instances  
you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on  
the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have “overloaded” the  
line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in  
problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is  
called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your  
telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the  
telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If  
any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately  
remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.  
WARNING:  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly  
approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate this  
equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone  
network, the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be  
stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily  
cease service, providing that they:  
a) promptly notify the customer.  
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication  
Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart  
E of Part 68.  
You should also know that:  
• Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as  
your machine, you may experience transmission and reception problems with all  
the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular  
telephone, share the line with your machine.  
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we  
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone  
lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and  
electronic specialty stores.  
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency  
numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the emergency service  
dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on  
how to actually test the emergency number.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
• You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a  
standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)  
Approvals and Certifications  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following  
applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the  
dates indicated:  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of the  
member states related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the  
laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their  
conformity.  
A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be  
obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.  
EC Certification  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications  
Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single  
terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network (PSTN) in  
accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with  
the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries:  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics  
Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of  
terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European  
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG  
201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network  
compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully  
compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
European Radio Approval Information  
(for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)  
This Product is a printer; low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF)  
wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz band, may be present  
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This  
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to  
verify the presence of wireless devices.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the  
European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with  
a Notified Body  
Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you  
printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission  
through the R&TTE directive.  
European States qualified under wireless approvals:  
EU  
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia,  
Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece,  
Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The  
Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden  
and the U.K.  
Outside EU  
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland  
European States with restrictions on use:  
EU  
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz  
for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless  
Outside EU  
No limitations at this time.  
Regulatory Compliance Statements  
Wireless Guidance  
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication  
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer  
system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating  
a wireless device.  
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the  
specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your  
system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval  
Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device  
in, is not listed, please contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements.  
Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your  
printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the  
wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer  
believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should  
be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation.  
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device  
and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include  
extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from  
the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other  
antenna or transmitter.  
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common  
restrictions are listed below:  
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on  
commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices  
to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. 802.11B (also known as  
wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples  
of devices that provide wireless communication.  
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or  
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless  
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen  
or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of  
wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments  
where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the  
applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the  
wireless device.  
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.  
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling  
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval  
authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a  
wireless device in the destination country.  
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless  
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields  
are in place and the system is fully assembled.  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any  
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use  
it. Please contact manufacturer for service.  
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be  
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact  
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)  
IMPORTANT  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and  
has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct  
13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover,  
do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.  
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable.  
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets.  
You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.  
WARNING  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug  
it into a socket.  
IMPORTANT WARNING: You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
• Green and Yellow:  
• Blue:  
Earth  
Neutral  
Live  
• Brown:  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the  
following:  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by  
the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or  
colored black.  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or  
colored red.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Differences Between British and American English  
British English  
American English  
(Re)dialing  
Color  
(Re)dialling  
Colour  
Emphasise  
Recognise  
Organise  
Authorise  
Cancelling  
Customise  
Grey  
Emphasize  
Recognize  
Organize  
Authorize  
Canceling  
Customize  
Gray  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTRODUCTION  
1
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional  
product. Your machine provides printing, copying,  
scanning, and faxing (SCX-4720F/4720FS only)  
functions!  
This chapter includes:  
• Special Features  
• Understanding Component Locations  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Special Features  
Your new machine is equipped with special features that  
improve the print quality. You can:  
Print with excellent quality and speed  
• You can print up to 1200 dpi [Best]. See page 4.8.  
• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 20 ppm and  
letter-sized paper at up to 22 ppm (pages per minute).  
Handle paper flexibly  
Multipurpose Tray supports letterhead, envelopes, labels,  
transparencies, custom-sized materials, postcards, and  
heavy paper. A 50-sheet Multipurpose Tray supports  
plain paper.  
• The Standard 250-sheet input tray (Tray1) and optional  
250-sheet input tray (Tray2) supports A4/letter-sized  
paper.  
Create professional documents  
• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents  
with words, such as “Confidential.See page 4.18.  
• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your  
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of  
paper and taped together to form a poster. See page 4.14.  
Save time and money  
• You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper  
to save paper.  
• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead on plain  
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by  
substantially reducing power consumption when not  
printing.  
• This machine meets Energy Star guidelines for energy  
efficiency.  
1.2  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Expand the machine capacity  
1
• This machine has 32 MB of memory which can be  
expanded to 160 MB.  
• You can install an optional 250-sheet tray in your machine.  
This tray reduces how often you have to add paper to the  
machine.  
• A PostScript 3 Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing  
(SCX-4520S/4720FS only).  
• A Network interface enables network printing. You can add  
the optional network interface card.  
You can also use an optional wireless network interface.  
* PostScript 3 Emulation  
© Copyright 1995-2004, Zoran Corporation. All  
rights reserved. Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3  
and OneImage are trademarks of zoran  
Corporation.  
* 136 PS3 fonts  
Contains UFST and MicroType from Agfa Monotype Corporation.  
Print in various environments  
• You can print in Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP  
.
• Your machine is compatible with various Linux  
.
• Your machine is compatible with various Macintosh  
(SCX-4520S/4720FS only).  
• Your machine comes with both the USB and Parallel  
interface. The Parallel interface is available depending on  
your country.  
• You can also use a Network interface. You can also use  
an optional wireless network interface, but, you need to  
add the optional network interface card.  
Use a USB flash drive  
If you have a USB flash drive, you can use it in various ways with  
your machine.  
• You can scan documents and save them on the USB flash  
drive.  
• You can directly print data stored on the USB flash drive.  
• You can manage the USB flash drive.  
• You can back up data and restore backup files to the  
machine’s memory.  
1.3  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Features  
The table below lists a general overview of features supported  
by your machine.  
(S: Standard, O: Option)  
SCX-4520/  
4720F  
SCX-4520S/  
4720FS  
Features  
IEEE 1284 Parallel  
USB 2.0  
S
S
-
S
S
S
PostScript Emulation  
Network Interface  
(Ethernet 10/100 Base TX)  
O
O
O
O
Wireless LAN  
(802.11b Wireless LAN)  
1.4  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Understanding Component  
Locations  
These are the main components of your machine:  
Front View  
Document  
Guides  
Document  
Cover  
Automatic  
Document Feeder  
Document  
Input Tray  
Document  
Output Tray  
USB Flash  
Drive Port  
Document Glass  
Control Panel  
(SCX-4720F/4720FS: see  
page 1.7.  
SCX-4520/4520S: see  
page 1.9.)  
Front Output Tray  
(Face Down)  
Front Door  
Toner  
Cartridge  
Paper Output  
Extension  
Paper Level Indicator  
Paper Tray  
(Tray 1)  
Optional Paper  
Tray (Tray 2)  
MultipurposeTray  
The figure above shows an SCX-4720F.  
1.5  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Rear View  
Rear Door  
Control  
Board  
Cover  
Wireless  
Network  
Antenna  
*
Network  
Port**  
Rear Output Slot  
(Face Up)  
Parallel  
Connector  
Power Switch  
USB  
Connector  
AC Power Cord  
Connector  
Line Jack  
(for the SCX-4720F/4720FS)  
EXT Jack***  
(for the SCX-4720F/  
4720FS)  
Tray 2Cable  
Connector  
The figure above shows an SCX-4720F.  
*
This wireless network antenna is not supplied with the machine. It is an option that must be  
purchased and installed separately.  
** The network port is not fitted as standard on the machine. You can purchase an optional network  
card and install it separately. For details, see page E.6.  
*** If your country has a different telephone connection system, this socket may be blocked.  
1.6  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control Panel Functions  
1
SCX-4720F/4720FS  
Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
numbers and dial them with the touch of a few  
buttons.  
1
Allows you to shift the one-touch buttons to  
the numbers 21 through 40.  
Allows you to access a list of your PC software  
programs that an image can be scanned to.  
You must create the scan list using the  
provided with this machine.  
Also allows you to scan and save documents in  
a USB flash drive, and manage it when it is  
inserted into the USB port of your machine.  
See Chapter 10, Installing a USB Flash Drive.  
2
S
C
A
N
Adjusts the brightness of the documents for  
the current copy job.  
Selects the document type for the current  
copy job.  
3
C
O
P
Y
Selects the number of copies.  
Allows you to use special copy features, such  
as Clone, Collation, Auto Fit, 2 Sides on 1  
page, 2/4 Up (multiple pages on a sheet), and  
Poster copying.  
Makes a copy smaller or larger than the  
original.  
Displays the current status and prompts  
during an operation.  
4
5
Turns on when the toner cartridge is empty.  
Uses to scroll through the available options for  
the selected menu item.  
1.7  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Confirms the selection on the display.  
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
menus available.  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
5
6
Stops an operation at any time.  
In Standby mode, clears/cancels the copy  
options, such as the darkness, the document  
type setting, the copy size, and the number of  
copies.  
Starts a job.  
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric  
characters.  
Adjusts the resolution of the documents for  
the current fax job.  
Allows you to send a fax to multiple  
destinations.  
Allows you to store frequently-dialed fax  
numbers as one or two-digit speed dial or  
group dial numbers for automatic dialing and  
edit the stored numbers. Also allows you to  
print a Phonebook list.  
7
F
A
X
In Standby mode, redials the last number or  
in Edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax  
number.  
Engages the telephone line.  
Allows you to directly print files stored on a  
USB flash drive when it is inserted into the  
USB port in the front of your machine.  
8
Allows you to save on toner by using less  
toner to print a document.  
9
S
A
V
E
Allows you to save on call costs by sending a  
fax at a preset toll-saving time. Using this  
feature, you can take advantage of lower long  
distance rates at night, for example.  
1.8  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCX-4520/4520S  
1
Adjusts the brightness of the documents for  
the current copy job.  
1
Selects the document type for the current  
copy job.  
Allows you to access a list of your PC software  
programs that an image can be scanned to.  
You must create the scan list using the  
Samsung software (Printer Settings Utility)  
2
S
C
A
N
Also allows you to scan and save documents in  
a USB flash drive, and manage it when it is  
inserted into the USB port of your machine.  
See Chapter 10, Installing a USB Flash Drive.  
Displays the current status and prompts  
during an operation.  
3
Turns on when the toner cartridge is empty.  
Uses to scroll through the available options for  
the selected menu item.  
Confirms the selection on the display.  
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the  
menus available.  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
4
Stops an operation at any time.  
In Standby mode, clears/cancels the copy  
options, such as the darkness, the document  
type setting, the copy size, and the number of  
copies.  
Starts a job.  
1.9  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selects the number of copies.  
Allows you to use special copy features, such  
as Clone, Collation, Auto Fit, 2 Sides on 1  
page, 2/4 Up (multiple pages on a sheet), and  
Poster copying.  
5
Makes a copy smaller or larger than the  
original.  
Allows you to save on toner by using less  
toner to print a document.  
6
7
Allows you to directly print files stored on a  
USB flash drive when it is inserted into the  
USB port in front of your machine.  
1.10  
INTRODUCTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING STARTED  
2
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for  
setting up your machine.  
• Setting Up Your Machine  
Unpacking  
Loading Paper  
Making Connections  
Setting the Machine ID (SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)  
Setting the Date and Time  
Setting the Paper Size and Type  
Using the Save Modes  
Installing Samsung Software in Windows  
Repairing Software  
Removing Software  
Using the Printer Settings Utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up Your Machine  
Unpacking  
1
Remove the machine and all accessories from the packing  
carton. Make sure that the machine has been packed with  
the following items:  
AC Power Cord*  
Telephone Line Cord*  
(for SCX-4720F/4720FS only)  
Starter Toner Cartridge  
CD-ROM**  
Quick Install Guide  
PostScript driver CD-ROM  
(for SCX-4520S/4720FS only)  
TAM Lead (for UK only)  
*The appearance of the power cord and the telephone line cord may differ depending on your country’s  
specifications.  
**The CD-ROM contains the Samsung printer drivers, Scan drivers, Printer Setting Utility, SmarThru  
software, the user’s guide, and the Adobe Acrobat Reader program.  
NOTES  
:
• Components may differ from country to country.  
• You should use the telephone line cord which is supplied with your machine. If you are  
replacing it with another vendor’s, it should be AWG #26 or lower gauge.  
• Power cord must be plugged into a grounded power socket.  
2.2  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Remove the packing tape from the front, back, and sides of  
the machine.  
2
Tape  
3
Gently pull the scan lock label until it comes away from the  
machine. This will pull the scanner locking switch into the  
FORWARD (Unlocked) position automatically.  
Scan Lock Label  
NOTE: When you are moving the  
machine or do not intend to use it for a  
long period of time, move the scanner  
locking switch BACKWARD to the lock  
position, as shown. To scan or copy a  
document, the switch must be unlocked.  
2.3  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting a Location  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air  
circulation. Allow extra space for opening doors and trays.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight  
or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine  
close to the edge of your desk or table.  
Clearance Space  
Front: 482.6 mm (enough space so that the paper tray  
can be removed)  
Back: 100 mm (enough space for ventilation)  
Right: 100 mm  
Left: 100 mm (enough space for ventilation)  
2.4  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the Toner Cartridge  
1
Open the front door.  
2
2
Remove the starter toner cartridge from its bag. Gently roll  
the cartridge 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner.  
Thoroughly rolling the cartridge will assure maximum  
copies per cartridge.  
NOTE: If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth  
and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
CAUTIONS:  
To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for  
more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if left  
exposed for more than a few minutes.  
• Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the  
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
2.5  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Hold the toner cartridge by the handle. Slowly insert the  
cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides  
of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the  
machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position  
until it locks into place completely.  
Groove  
Tab  
4
Close the front door. Make sure that the door is securely  
closed.  
NOTE: When printing text at 5% coverage, you can expect a toner  
cartridge life of approximately 5,000 or 3,000 pages. (3,000 pages  
for the toner cartridge that is shipped with the machine.)  
2.6  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
The paper tray can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 20 lb plain  
paper.  
2
To load a stack of Letter-sized paper:  
1
Pull open the paper tray and remove it from the machine.  
2
3
Fan the edges of the paper stack to separate the pages.  
Then tap the stack on a flat surface to even it up.  
Insert the paper stack into the paper tray with the side to  
be printed on facing down  
.
2.7  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NOTE: If you want to load a different sized paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides. For details, see page 2.9.  
4
Pay attention to the paper limit mark on both inside walls of  
the tray. Paper overloading may cause paper jams.  
5
Insert and slide the paper tray back into the machine.  
NOTE: After you load paper, you need to set up your machine for  
the paper type and size you loaded. See page 2.20 for copying and  
faxing, or page 4.6 for PC-printing. The settings made from the  
printer driver override the settings on the control panel.  
2.8  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Size of the Paper in the Paper Tray  
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you  
need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
1
After pressing and unlatching the guide lock, slide the paper  
length guide out completely to extend the paper tray to its  
full length.  
2
2
After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the length guide  
and slide it until it lightly touches the end of the paper  
stack.  
For paper smaller than Letter size, adjust the front paper  
length guide so that it lightly touches the paper stack.  
2.9  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Squeeze the width guide, as shown and slide it to the stack  
of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack.  
NOTES  
:
• Do not push the paper width guide far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper  
jams.  
2.10  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making Connections  
1
If you have SCX-4520/4520S:  
Skip this step and proceed to step 2.  
If you have SCX-4720F/4720FS:  
2
Plug one end of the supplied telephone line cord into the  
LINE jack on the machine and the other end into the wall  
jack.  
To the wall jack  
If you want to use your machine to receive both faxes and  
voice calls, you will need to connect a telephone and/or  
answering machine to your machine.  
Plug your extension phone or answering machine card into  
the EXT jack, as shown below.  
To an extension phone or  
answering machine  
2.11  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
UK users should plug the cord of the extension phone into  
the supplied TAM lead and plug the cord of the TAM lead  
into the EXT jack on the back of your machine.  
TAM lead  
(For UK users only)  
NOTES  
:
• Use the TAM lead and the telephone line cord supplied with your  
machine.  
• In the United Kingdom, if a three-wire type (SHUNT-wire, older  
equipment) telephone or answering machine is connected to the  
EXT jack on the machine, the external equipment will fail to ring  
when receiving an incoming call as the machine is designed to  
operate with the latest technology. To prevent this  
incompatibility, use two-wire (newer equipment) telephones or  
answering machines.  
2
Connect a USB cable to the USB connector on your  
machine. You need to buy a USB 2.0 compliant cable that is  
within 3 m in length  
To the USB port on your computer  
2.12  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you want to use a parallel printer cable, purchase only an  
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable and connect it to the  
parallel connector on your machine.  
Push the metal clips down to fit inside the notches on the  
cable plug.  
2
To the parallel port on your computer  
NOTES  
:
• You only need to connect one of the cables mentioned above. Do  
not use the parallel and the USB cables at the same time.  
• If you are using a USB cable, you must be running Windows 98/  
Me/2000/XP, or Machintosh with OS 10.1~10.3 (SCX-4520S/  
4720FS only).  
• The parallel port may not be available depending on your  
country.  
2.13  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning the Machine On  
1
Plug one end of the supplied three-pronged electrical cord  
into the AC socket on the machine and the other end into a  
properly grounded AC outlet.  
2
Press the power switch to turn the machine on. “Warming  
Up Please Wait” appears on the display indicating that the  
machine is now on.  
To the AC wall jack  
To view your display text in another language, see  
page 2.15.  
CAUTIONS  
:
• The fuser area inside of the rear door of your machine becomes  
very hot when in use. Take care not to burn your fingers when  
you access this area.  
• Do not disassemble the machine with power on. If you do, you  
may receive an electric shock.  
2.14  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Up the Machine  
System  
2
Changing the Display Language  
To change the language that displays on the control panel,  
follow these steps:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Language” appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
Press Enter. The current setting appears on the bottom line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the language you want  
appears on the display.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
2.15  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting the Machine ID  
(SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax  
number on any fax you send. The Machine ID, containing your  
telephone number and name (or company name), will be printed  
at the top of each page sent from your machine.  
1
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display. The first available menu item, “Machine ID,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter. The display asks you to enter the fax number.  
If there is a number already set, the number appears.  
Enter your fax number using the number keypad.  
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the  
button to delete the last digit.  
4
5
Press Enter when the number on the display is correct. The  
display asks you to enter an ID.  
Enter your name or the company name using the number  
keypad.  
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the number  
button.  
0
For details on how to use the number keypad to enter  
alphanumeric characters, see “Entering Characters Using  
the Number Keypad” on page 2.17.  
If you want to enter the same letter or number in  
succession (e.g. SS, AA, 777), enter one digit, move the  
cursor by pressing the button and enter the next digit.  
If you want to insert a space in the name, you can also use  
the button to move the cursor to skip the position.  
6
7
Press Enter when the name on the display is correct.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
2.16  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Entering Characters Using the  
Number Keypad  
As you perform various tasks, you need to enter names and  
numbers. For example, when you set up your machine, you  
enter your name (or your company’s name) and telephone  
number. When you store one-, two-, or three-digit speed dial or  
group dial numbers, you may also enter the corresponding  
names.  
2
To enter alphanumeric characters:  
1
When you are prompted to enter a letter,  
locate the button labeled with the  
character you want. Press the button until  
the correct letter appears on the display.  
For example, to enter the letter  
press , labeled with “MNO.”  
O,  
6
Each time you press  
shows a different letter,  
, and finally  
6, the display  
M,  
N,  
O
6.  
You can enter special characters, such as space, plus sign,  
and etc.. For details, see “Keypad Letters and Numbers” on  
page 2.18.  
2
3
To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.  
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the  
cursor by pressing the button and then press the button  
labeled with the letter you want. The cursor will move to the  
right and the next letter will appear on the display.  
You can enter a space by pressing  
1
twice.  
When you finish entering letters, press Enter  
.
2.17  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Keypad Letters and Numbers  
Key  
1
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters  
1
A
D
G
J
Space  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
B
E
C
F
I
2
3
4
5
H
K
N
Q
U
L
M
P
O
6
R
V
S
8
7
T
W
X
Y
Z
9
+
-
,
.
/
*
#
&
0
Changing Numbers or Names  
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press  
the button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the  
correct number or character.  
Inserting a Pause  
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9,  
for example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases,  
you must insert a pause in the telephone number. You can insert  
a pause while you are setting up one-touch or speed dial  
numbers.  
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place  
while entering the telephone number. A “  
display at the corresponding location.  
” appears on the  
2.18  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Date and Time  
The current date and time are shown on the display when your  
machine is on and ready to work. For the SCX-4720F/4720FS,  
all of your faxes will have the date and time printed on them.  
2
NOTE: If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the  
correct time and date once the power has been restored.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Date & Time” on  
the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Enter the correct time and date using the number keypad.  
For the SCX-4520/4520S, press the scroll button (  
to enter the time and date.  
or  
)  
Month  
Day  
Year  
= 01 ~ 12  
= 01 ~ 31  
= requires four digits  
= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)  
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)  
= 00 ~ 59  
Hour  
Minute  
NOTE: The date format may differ from country to country.  
You can also use the scroll button ( or ) to move the  
cursor under the digit you want to correct and enter a new  
number. For the SCX-4520/4520S, you can use Enter or  
Upper Level to move the cursor.  
4
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
or  
button or any number button. For the SCX-4520/4520S,  
press Enter and then the scroll button ( or ).  
When the cursor is not under the AM or PM indicator,  
pressing the  
or  
button immediately moves the cursor  
to the indicator. For the SCX-4520/4520S, press the scroll  
button ( or ) to move the cursor to the indicator.  
You can change the clock mode to 24-hour format (e.g.  
01:00 PM as 13:00). For details, see page 2.20.  
2.19  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
Press Enter when the time and date on the display is  
correct.  
When you enter a wrong number, the machine beeps and  
does not proceed to the next step. If this happens, just  
reenter the correct number.  
Changing the Clock Mode  
You can set your machine to display the current time using  
either a 12-hour or 24-hour format.  
1
2
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Clock Mode”  
on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
The clock mode currently set for the machine displays.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to select the other mode and  
then press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Setting the Paper Size and Type  
After loading paper in the paper tray, the standard Tray1,  
Multipurpose tray, or optional Tray2, you need to set the paper  
size and type using the control panel buttons. These settings will  
apply to copy and fax modes. For PC-printing, you need to select  
the paper size and type in the application program you use on  
your PC.  
1
Press Menu.  
The display shows “Paper Setting” on the top line of the  
display.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Paper Size” on  
the bottom line and press Enter to access the menu item.  
The first item, “Tray Paper,” displays on the bottom line.  
If the optional Tray 2 is installed, “Tray1 Size” displays on  
the bottom line.  
2.20  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
4
Use the scroll button ( or ) to select the paper tray you  
want to use and press Enter  
.
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper size you are  
using and press Enter to save it.  
2
5
6
Press Upper Level.  
Press the button to scroll to “Paper Type” and press Enter  
to access the menu item.  
7
8
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the paper type you are  
using and press Enter to save it.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Setting Sounds (SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)  
You can control the following sounds:  
• Speaker: You can turn on or off the sounds from the  
telephone line through the speaker, such as the dial tone or a  
fax tone. With this option set to “Comm.” the speaker is on  
until the remote machine answers.  
• Ringer: You can adjust the ringer volume.  
• Key Sound: With this option set to “On” a key tone sounds  
each time a key is pressed.  
• Alarm Sound: You can turn the alarm sound on or off. With  
this option set to “On” an alarm tone sounds when an  
error occurs or fax communication ends.  
• You can adjust the volume level using the On Hook Dial  
button.  
Speaker, Ringer, Key Sound, and  
Alarm Sound  
1
Press Menu until “Sound/Volume” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
2.21  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the  
options. Press Enter when you see the desired sound  
option.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the desired status  
or volume for the option you have selected.  
You will see the selection on the bottom line of the display.  
For the ringer volume, you can select “Off,Low,Mid,”  
and “High.Setting “Off” means that the ringer does not  
sound. The machine works normally even if the ringer is  
turned off.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection. The next sound option  
appears.  
5
6
If necessary, repeat steps 2 through 4.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Speaker Volume  
1
2
Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the speaker.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you hear the volume  
you want. The display shows the current volume level.  
3
Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to  
Standby mode.  
NOTE: You can adjust the speaker volume only when the  
telephone line is connected.  
2.22  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Save Modes  
Toner Save Mode  
2
Toner Save mode allows your machine to use less toner on each  
page. Activating this mode extends the life of the toner cartridge  
beyond what one would experience in the normal mode, but it  
reduces print quality.  
To turn the toner save mode on or off, press Toner Save  
.
• If the button backlight is on, the mode is active and the  
machine uses less toner when printing a document.  
• If the button backlight is off, the mode is deactivated and  
the machine prints with the normal quantity of toner.  
NOTE: When PC-printing, you can also turn on or off the toner  
save mode in the printer properties. See page 4.8.  
Toll Save Mode (SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)  
Using the Toll Save button on the control panel, you can quickly  
set your machine to send the document(s) stored in memory  
during a preset time slot, when the call charge is lower. This Toll  
Save mode helps you to take advantage of lower long distance  
rates at night, for example.  
NOTE: The toll-saving time slot may vary depending on your  
contract with your long distance phone company.  
To turn the toll save mode on:  
1
2
3
Press Toll Save. The button backlight turns on.  
Press Enter when “Start Time” displays on the bottom line.  
Enter the time and date when your machine starts sending  
toll save faxes, using the number keypad.  
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
4
Press Enter when the start time and date on the display is  
correct.  
2.23  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5
6
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “End Time” and  
press Enter  
.
Enter the time and date when the toll save transmission  
ends, using the number keypad.  
7
8
Press Enter to save the setting.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Once Toll Save mode is activated, your machine stores into  
memory all of the documents to be faxed and sends them at the  
programed time.  
To turn Toll Save mode off, press Toll Save again. The button  
backlight turns off and the mode is deactivated.  
NOTE: Once the toll-saving time is set, the Toll Save button  
allows you only to enable or disable the toll save mode. To change  
the time setting, use the Toll Save item in the Advanced Fax  
menu. See page 7.38.  
Power Save Mode  
Power Save mode allows your machine to reduce power  
consumption when it is not in actual use. You can turn this mode  
on and select a length of time for which the machine waits after  
a job is printed before it switches to a reduced power state.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Power Save” appears  
on the bottom line. Press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “On” on the  
bottom line and press Enter  
.
Selecting “Off” means that the power save mode is  
deactivated.  
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the time setting you  
want appears.  
The available options are 5, 10, 15, 30, and 45 (minutes).  
2.24  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
2
Scan Lamp Save Mode  
Scan Lamp Save mode allows you to save the scan lamp. The  
scan lamp under the document glass automatically turns off  
when it is not in actual use to reduce power consumption and  
extend the life of the lamp. The lamp automatically wakes up  
after some warm-up time when you start scanning.  
You can set the length of time for which the scan lamp waits  
after a scan job is completed before it switches to the power  
save mode.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Scan PWR Save”  
appears on the bottom line. Press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the time setting you  
want appears on the bottom line.  
The available time options are 0.5, 1, 4, 8, and 12 (hours).  
4
5
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
2.25  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing Software  
About Samsung Software  
You must install the printer software using the supplied CD-ROM  
after you have set up your machine and connected it to your  
computer. The CD-ROM provides you with the following  
software:  
Programs for Windows  
To use your machine as a printer and scanner in Windows, you  
must install the MFP driver. You can install selectively or all the  
following components:  
Printer driver- Use this driver to take full advantage of  
your printer’s features.  
Scanner driver- TWAIN and Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver are available for scanning documents on your  
machine.  
Printer Setting Utility- This program is automatically  
installed when you install the MFP driver. For information  
about using the program, see page 2.37.  
SmarThru- It is the accompanying Windows-based  
software for your multifunctional machine. Allows you to  
edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful  
image editor and to send the image by e-mail. You can  
also open another image editor program installed in your  
Windows, like Adobe PhotoShop, from SmarThru.  
For details, please refer to the onscreen help supplied on  
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file (SCX-4520S/  
4720FS only) - It allows you to install the PostScript driver.  
For details about installing the PostScript driver, see  
page B.2.  
Linux Driver  
You can print and scan in Linux using your machine. For  
information about installing the MFP driver in Linux, see  
page A.3  
.
2.26  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Macintosh Printer Driver (SCX-4520S/4720FS only)  
You can use your machine with a Macintosh computer. For  
information about installing the printer driver on a Macintosh,  
see page C.2.  
2
Printer Driver Features  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
• Paper source selection  
• Paper size, orientation and media type  
• number of copies  
The following table lists a general overview of features  
supported by your printer drivers.  
PostScript  
SCX-4520S/4720FS  
PCL 6 Printer  
Driver  
O
P
Feature  
Win 9x/Me/  
2000/XP/NT4.0  
Win  
9x/Me  
Win  
2000/XP  
Win  
NT4.0  
Mac  
Linux  
Toner Save  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Print quality option  
Poster printing  
N
N
N
N
N
Multiple pages per  
sheet (N-up)  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y(2,4)  
Fit to page printing  
Scale printing  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Different source for  
first page  
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
Watermark  
Overlay  
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
TrueType fonts  
option  
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
2.27  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing Samsung Software in  
Windows  
System Requirements  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the minimum  
requirements.  
Item  
Requirements  
Recommended  
Operating  
system  
Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP  
Windows 95/98/  
Me/NT 4.0/2000  
Pentium II 400  
MHz or higher  
Pentium III 933  
MHz  
CPU  
RAM  
Pentium III 933  
MHz or higher  
Pentium IV 1  
GHz  
Windows XP  
Windows 95/98/  
Me/NT 4.0/2000  
64 MB or higher  
128 MB or higher  
300 MB or higher  
1 GB or higher  
128 MB  
256 MB  
1 GB  
Windows XP  
Windows 95/98/  
Me/NT 4.0/2000  
Free disk  
space  
Windows XP  
5.0 or higher  
5 GB  
Internet  
Explorer  
5.5  
NOTE: For Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, the system administrator  
should install the software.  
2.28  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installing Samsung Software  
NOTES  
:
• Cancel the “New Hardware Found” window when your computer  
boots up.  
2
• Make sure that your machine is turned on and connected to your  
computer’s parallel port or USB port before installing  
software. Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 do not support the  
USB connection.  
1
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter  
of your drive and click OK  
.
NOTE: If your machine is not already connected to the computer,  
when the following window opens, connect your machine to the  
computer and turn the machine on. Then click Next  
.
If the machine is already connected and turned on, this screen will  
not appear. Skip to the next step.  
2.29  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Choose the installation type.  
Typical: Installs the most common software for your  
machine, such as the PCL 6 printer driver, scanner driver,  
and Printer Setting Utility. This is recommended for most  
users.  
Custom: Allows you to choose the language of the  
software and the components you want to install. After  
selecting the language and the component(s), click Next  
.
Install SmarThru: Installs the SmarThru program. If  
you select to install SmarThru on this screen, follow from  
step 3 on page 2.32.  
View User’s Guide: Allows you to view this User’s  
Guide. If your computer does not have Adobe Acrobat,  
click on this option and it will automatically install Adobe  
Acrobat Reader for you.  
3
After the installation is finished, the window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the check box and click Next. Otherwise, just  
click Next and skip to step 6.  
2.30  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
5
When the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not,  
click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers to receive  
information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click  
Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.  
2
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
NOTES  
:
• When you want to use your machine with the parallel cable,  
remove the USB cable and connect the parallel cable. Then  
reinstall the printer driver; select Start  
Programs  
Samsung SCX-4x20 Series Maintenance  
Repair  
Printer. If you have replaced the parallel cable with the USB  
cable, do the same to reinstall the driver.  
• If your machine doesn’t work properly, reinstall the printer  
driver.  
2.31  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Samsung SmarThru 4  
NOTE: SmarThru 4 does not support Windows 95.  
1
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
Click Install SmarThru  
.
3
4
5
6
Click Next  
Follow the on-screen instructions and click Next  
Click Next  
Select the installation type and click Next  
The software installation supports two types of setup:  
.
.
.
.
2.32  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Typical: The program will be installed with the most  
common options and is recommended for most users.  
Custom: You may choose the options you want to install.  
If you select the Custom installation, you may choose the  
components you want to install. Click Next  
.
2
Basic SmarThru components: to use the basic  
SmarThru 4 applications and core service.  
Scan: to scan the original document and save it in an  
application or folder, email it, or publish it on a web site.  
Image: to edit an images you have saved as a graphic  
file.  
Copy: to produce professional quality copies.  
Print: to print images you have saved.  
7
8
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the  
installation.  
When the installation is finished, click Finish  
.
2.33  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repairing Software  
Repair is required if your installation fails or the software does  
not work properly. This Repair procedure does not physically  
repair SmarThru software.  
1
2
You can select Start  
Programs  
.
Samsung SCX-4x20  
Series Maintenance  
Select Repair  
.
NOTE: If your machine is not connected to the computer, the  
Connect Samsung SCX-4x20 Series window opens. After  
connecting the machine, click Next  
.
3
Select the components you want to reinstall and click Next.  
2.34  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If you select Printer, the window asking you to print a test  
page appears. Do as follows:  
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click Next  
.
b. When the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If it  
doesn’t, click No to reprint it.  
2
4
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish.  
Removing Software  
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software or if your  
installation fails. You can uninstall the item you want using the  
Windows uninstallShield.  
Uninstalling the MFP Driver  
1
2
You can select Start  
Programs  
Samsung SCX-4x20  
.
Series Maintenance  
Remove  
Select a component in the MFP driver to uninstall  
individually:  
If you want to uninstall the PCL printer driver, select  
Printer  
.
If you want to uninstall the TWAIN and WIA driver, select  
TWAIN[WIA]  
.
If you want to uninstall the Printer Settings Utility, select  
Printer Settings Utility  
.
3
4
Select the components you want to remove and then click  
Next  
.
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes  
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
5
When the uninstallation is done, click Finish.  
2.35  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru  
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all applications  
are closed on your computer. A system reboot is required after the  
software is uninstalled.  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs  
.
Select SmarThru 4, and then select Uninstall SmarThru  
4
.
3
4
When your computer asks you to confirm, click OK  
Click Finish  
.
.
You may be prompted to restart your computer. In this case  
you must shut the computer down and then restart it before  
the changes will be saved.  
2.36  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Printer Settings Utility  
Using Printer Settings Utility, you can create and edit Phonebook  
entries from your computer and set up print and scan system  
data options. You can also configure the destination launches  
when you use the Scan-to button on the control panel, and  
update the firmware of the machine.  
2
When you install the Samsung software, the Printer Settings  
Utility program is automatically installed.  
For information about installing the Samsung software, see  
page 2.29.  
To open the Printer Settings Utility:  
1
2
3
Start your Windows.  
Click the Start button on your desktop computer.  
From Programs, select Samsung SCX-4x20 Series and  
then Printer Settings Utility  
.
The Printer Settings Utility window opens.  
4
The Printer Settings Utility window provides the following  
tabs: Scan Settings  
,
Phonebook (only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS), Printer, and Firmware Update  
.
To exit, click the Exit button at the bottom of each tab.  
For further details, click the Help button at the bottom of  
each tab.  
2.37  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Scan Settings Tab  
Click the Scan Settings tab to configure the scan destination  
list that appears on the control panel display when you press  
Scan-to on the control panel. Using the destination list, you can  
select a software program that an image can be scanned to.  
You can also configure the scan settings, such as the output type  
and resolution.  
Select the program  
you want from the  
Available Scan  
Destinations and click  
to add it to the  
Front Panel  
Destination List. To  
delete the selected  
program, click  
.
Downloads the  
Click to restore the  
default settings.  
settings made in the  
Printer Settings Utility  
to your machine.  
The Phonebook Tab (SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)  
Click the Phonebook tab to create and edit Phonebook entries.  
Reads the Phonebook  
entries from the  
machine to the  
Printer Settings  
Utility.  
Downloads the  
Phonebook entries  
from the Printer  
SettingsUtilitytothe  
machine.  
Phonebook entries  
Allows you to edit  
a selected  
Phonebook entry  
in a separate Edit  
window.  
Allows you to set up  
group dial numbers.  
See page 2.39.  
Deletes a selected  
Phonebook entry.  
Deletes all Phonebook  
entries.  
2.38  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you click Group dial, the following window opens.  
Enter a name for  
the group.  
2
Shows the  
Phonebook entries  
Shows the numbers  
included in the group.  
To remove a number,  
select it and click  
you can include in  
the group. After  
selecting a number,  
click Add to move it  
to the Included  
Remove  
.
numbers list.  
Click to save the group dial number after adding  
or removing numbers for the group.  
The Printer Tab  
Click the Printer tab to configure print system settings.  
Allows you to select  
the default  
orientation of print  
image on the page.  
Allows you to set the  
margin of print  
materials.  
Allows you to set the  
PCL emulation  
configuration.  
Downloads the  
settings made in the  
Printer Settings Utility  
to your machine.  
2.39  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Firmware Update Tab  
Click the Firmware Update tab to update the firmware of your  
machine. This feature should be used by an authorized  
technician. Please consult with the purchase point.  
2.40  
GETTING STARTED  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAPER HANDLING  
3
This chapter introduces you to the basics of selecting  
print materials and loading them into your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
• Selecting Print Materials  
• Loading Paper  
• Selecting an Output Location  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Print Materials  
You can print on a variety of print materials, such as plain paper,  
envelopes, labels, transparencies, and etc.. Always use print  
materials that meet the guidelines for use with this machine.  
See “Paper Specifications” on page F.6. To get the best possible  
print quality, use only high-quality copier-grade paper.  
When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
• Desired outcome: The paper you choose should be  
appropriate for your project.  
• Size: You can use any size paper that fits easily within the  
paper adjusters of the paper tray.  
• Weight: Your machine supports paper weights as follows:  
- 16 ~ 24 lb (60 ~ 90 g/m2) bond for the standard paper tray  
(Tray 1) and optional paper tray (Tray 2)  
- 16 ~ 43 lb (60 ~ 163 g/m2) bond for the Multipurpose tray  
• Brightness: Some papers are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the paper affects  
how crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
CAUTION: Using print materials that dose not conform to the  
specifications listed on page F.9 may cause problems that may  
require service. This service is not covered by the warranty or  
service agreements.  
Paper Type, Input Sources, and Capacities  
Input Source/Capacity*  
Paper Type  
Optional  
Tray 2  
Multipurpose  
tray  
Tray 1  
Plain paper  
250  
250  
50  
5
Envelopes  
-
-
-
-
Labels**  
5
Transparencies**  
Card stock**  
-
-
-
-
5
5
* Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and  
environmental conditions.  
**If you experience excessive jamming, load one sheet at a time through the  
Multipurpose tray.  
3.2  
PAPER HANDLING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Guidelines for Paper and Special Materials  
When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other special  
material, keep these guidelines in mind:  
• Always use paper and other materials that conform with the  
specifications listed under “Paper Specifications” on page F.6.  
• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper  
can cause paper jams and poor print quality.  
• Use only high quality copier grade paper for the best print  
quality.  
3
• Avoid paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a  
texture that is too smooth or too rough. Paper jams may  
occur.  
• Store paper in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use.  
Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not  
place heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is  
packaged or unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture, or  
other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl.  
• Store unused materials at temperatures between 15 oC and  
30 oC (59 oF to 86 oF). The relative humidity should be  
between 10 % and 70 %.  
• During storage, you should use a moisture-proof wrap, such  
as a plastic container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture  
from contaminating your paper.  
• Load special paper types one sheet at a time through the  
Multipurpose tray to avoid paper jams.  
• Only use materials specifically recommended for use in laser  
printers.  
To prevent special materials, such as transparencies and label  
sheets from sticking together, remove them as they print out.  
• For envelopes:  
- Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well  
creased folds.  
- Do not use envelopes with clasps and snaps.  
- Do not use envelopes with windows, coated lining, self-  
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.  
- Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
• For transparencies:  
- Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the  
machine.  
- Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods of time.  
Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty  
printing.  
PAPER HANDLING 3.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
- To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them  
carefully.  
- To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to  
prolonged sunlight.  
• For labels:  
- Verify that their adhesive material can tolerate a fusing  
temperature of 200 oC (392 o F) for 0.1 second.  
- Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material  
between them. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off  
during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed  
adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.  
- Do not load a sheet of them through the machine more than  
once. The adhesive backing is designed for one pass  
through the machine.  
- Do not use labels that are separating from the backing  
sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled or otherwise damaged.  
• Do not use Carbonless paper and Tracing paper. Use of  
these types of paper could result in chemical smells and could  
damage your machine.  
Loading Paper  
In the Standard Tray  
Load the print material you use for the majority of your print  
jobs in the standard tray.  
The standard tray can hold a maximum of 250 sheets of 20 lb  
plain paper.  
You can purchase an optional paper tray (Tray 2) and attach it  
below the standard tray to load an additional 250 sheets of  
paper. See page E.10 for more information about installing the  
optional Tray 2.  
3.4  
PAPER HANDLING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The paper level indicator on the front of the paper tray shows  
the amount of paper currently left in the tray. When the tray is  
empty, the indicator of the bar is completely lowered.  
Paper full  
3
Paper empty  
To load paper, pull open the paper tray and load paper with the  
side to be printed on face down.  
You can load letterhead paper with the design side face down.  
The top edge of the sheet with the logo should be placed at the  
front of the tray.  
For details about loading paper in the paper tray, see “Loading  
Paper” on page 2.7.  
NOTES  
:
• If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a  
time in the Multipurpose tray.  
• You can load up to 150 sheets of previously printed paper. The  
printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the  
front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper  
around. Note that the print quality is not guaranteed.  
PAPER HANDLING 3.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In the Multipurpose Tray  
The Multipurpose tray can hold several sizes and types of print  
material, such as transparencies, postcards, note cards, and  
envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or  
colored paper. You can load approximately 50 sheets of plain  
paper, 5 envelopes, 5 transparencies, 5 sheets of card stock, or  
5 labels at a time.  
To load print material in the Multipurpose tray:  
1
Lower the Multipurpose tray and unfold the paper support  
extension, as shown.  
2
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper  
stack to separate the pages before loading.  
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid  
touching the print side. Oils from your fingers can cause  
print quality problems.  
3.6  
PAPER HANDLING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Load the print material with the side to be printed on  
facing up  
.
3
For envelopes, load them with the flap side down and with  
the stamp area on the top left side.  
NOTES  
:
• If envelopes jam while printing, try reducing the number of  
envelopes in the Multipurpose tray.  
• If you want to print on previously printed paper from the  
Multipurpose tray, the printed side should be facing down with an  
uncurled edge toward the machine. If you experience problems  
with the paper feeding, turn the paper around.  
4
Squeeze the width guide and adjust it to the width of the  
print material without bending it.  
5
After loading paper, you need to set the paper type and size  
for the Multipurpose tray. See page 2.20 for copying and  
faxing or page 4.6 for PC-printing.  
NOTE: The settings made from the printer driver override the  
settings on the control panel.  
PAPER HANDLING 3.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
If you want the machine to stack the printed pages on the  
rear output slot, open the rear door to use the rear output  
slot.  
CAUTION: Make sure to open the rear output slot when you print  
on transparencies. If not, they may tear while exiting the machine.  
7
After printing, fold away the paper support extension and  
close the Multipurpose tray.  
Using the Manual Feed Mode  
You can manually load a sheet of print material in the  
Multipurpose tray if you select Manual Feed in the Source  
option from the Paper tab when you change print settings to  
print a document. For details about changing print settings, see  
page 4.6. Manually loading paper can be helpful when you want  
to check the print quality after each page is printed.  
This loading procedure is almost the same as the procedure for  
loading in the Multipurpose tray, except you load paper sheet-  
by-sheet in the tray, send print data to print the first page, and  
press Enter on the control panel to print each following page.  
1
Lower the Multipurpose tray and unfold the paper support  
extension.  
2
Load a sheet of print material with the side to be printed  
on facing up  
.
3.8  
PAPER HANDLING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Squeeze the width guide and adjust it to the width of the  
print material without bending it.  
3
4
If you want the machine to stack the printed pages on the  
rear output slot, open the rear door to use the rear output  
slot.  
CAUTION: Make sure to open the rear output slot when you print  
on transparencies. If not, they may tear while exiting the machine.  
5
After printing, fold away the paper support extension and  
close the Multipurpose tray.  
Tips on Using the Multipurpose Tray  
• Load only one size of print material at a time in the  
Multipurpose tray.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still  
paper in the Multipurpose tray. This also applies to other  
types of print materials.  
• Print materials should be loaded face up with the top edge  
going into the Multipurpose tray first and be placed in the  
center of the tray.  
• Always load only the print materials specified in the  
Specifications on page F.6 to avoid paper jams and print  
quality problems.  
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before  
loading them into the Multipurpose tray.  
• When you print on 76 mm x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) sized media  
on the Multipurpose tray, open the rear door to use the rear  
output slot.  
• Make sure to open the rear door when you print on  
transparencies. If not, they may tear while exiting the  
machine.  
PAPER HANDLING 3.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Output Location  
The machine has two output locations: the rear output slot (face  
up) and the front output tray (face down).  
Front output  
tray  
Rear output slot  
To use the front output tray, make sure that the rear door is  
closed. To use the rear output slot, open the rear door.  
NOTES  
:
• If paper coming out of the front output tray has problems, such  
as excessive curl, try printing to the rear output slot.  
To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear door while the  
machine is printing.  
Printing to the Front Output Tray (Face down)  
The front output tray collects printed paper face down, in the  
order in which the sheets were printed. The tray should be used  
for most print jobs.  
3.10  
PAPER HANDLING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing to the Rear Output Slot (Face up)  
Using the rear output slot, paper comes out of the machine  
face up.  
3
Printing from the Multipurpose tray to the rear output slot  
provides a straight paper path. Using the rear output slot  
might improve the output quality with the following:  
• envelopes  
• labels  
• small custom-sized paper  
• postcards  
• transparencies  
To use the rear output slot:  
1
Open the rear door by pulling it upward.  
CAUTION: The fuser area inside the rear door of your machine  
becomes very hot when in use. Take care not to burn your fingers  
when you access this area.  
PAPER HANDLING 3.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
If you do not want to stack the printed pages on the rear  
output slot, close the rear door. The pages stack on the  
front output tray.  
3.12  
PAPER HANDLING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINTING TASKS  
4
Windows and how to use the print settings.  
This chapter includes:  
• Printing a Document in Windows  
• Printer Settings  
• Printing Posters  
• Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size  
• Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document  
• Using Watermarks  
• Using Overlays  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing a Document in Windows  
The following procedure describes the general steps required for  
printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps for  
printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your  
software application for the exact printing procedure.  
NOTE: For detailed information about printing from a Macintosh  
computer or a Linux system, see Appendix C and Appendix A.  
(Macintosh is supports only SCX-4520S/4720FS)  
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window opens.  
It may look slightly different depending on your application.  
You can select the basic print settings within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
the print range.  
Make sure that your  
machine is selected.  
Windows XP  
3
4
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
machine, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s Print window. Go to step 4.  
If you see a Setup Printer, or Options button in your  
,
Print window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the  
next screen.  
Click OK to close the printer properties window.  
4.2  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.  
Canceling a Print Job  
There are two ways to cancel a print job:  
To stop a print job from the control panel:  
Press the Stop/Clear button.  
Your machine finishes printing the page  
that is moving through the machine and  
deletes the rest of the print job. Pressing  
the button cancels only the current job.  
If more than one print job is in the  
machine’s memory, you need to press  
the button once for each job.  
4
To stop a print job from the Printers folder:  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such  
as the Printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 9x/NT4.0/2000/Me, select Settings and then  
Printers  
.
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes  
.
3
4
Double-click the Samsung SCX-4x20 Series PCL 6 icon.  
From the Document menu:  
For Windows 9x/Me, select Cancel Printing  
For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP, select Cancel  
.
.
NOTE: You can access this window simply by double-clicking the  
machine icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer Settings  
You can use the Samsung SCX-4x20 Series printer properties  
window, which allows you to access all of the printer options you  
need when using your machine. When the printer properties are  
displayed, you can review and change whatever settings are  
needed for your print job.  
The printer’s properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This User’s Guide shows the Printing  
Preferences window for Windows XP.  
Your printer’s Printing Preferences window consists of 5 tabs:  
Layout  
,
Paper Graphics, Extras, and About.  
,
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your Windows  
User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see page 4.11).  
NOTES  
:
• Most Windows applications will override the settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all of the print settings available in  
the software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes permanent,  
make them in the Printers folder. Follow this procedure:  
1. Click the Windows Start menu.  
2. For Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and  
then Printers  
.
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes  
.
3. Select the Samsung SCX-4x20 Series PCL 6 machine  
icon.  
4. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and:  
• In Windows 95/98/Me, select Properties  
• In Windows 2000/XP, select Printing Preferences  
• In Windows NT 4.0, select Document Default  
5. Change the settings on each tab, and click OK  
.
.
.
.
4.4  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Layout tab  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes  
Multiple Pages per Side and Poster. See page 4.2 for more  
information on accessing printer properties.  
1
2
4
The preview image  
shows the sample page  
with the settings you  
specified.  
Property  
Description  
Orientation allows you to select the  
direction in which information is printed  
on a page.  
1
Orientation  
Portrait prints across the width of  
the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length  
of the page, spreadsheet style.  
If you want to turn the page upside  
down, select Rotate 180 Degrees  
.
portrait  
Landscape  
Layout Options allows you to select  
advanced printing options. For details,  
see page 4.13~4.14.  
2
Layout  
Options  
PRINTING TASKS 4.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper Tab  
Use the following options for paper handling. See page 4.2 for  
more information about accessing printer properties.  
Click the Paper tab to access many paper properties.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Property  
Copies  
Description  
Copies allows you to choose the number of  
copies to be printed. You can enter up to 999.  
1
2
Size allows you to choose the size of the  
paper loaded in the tray.  
Size  
If the required size is not listed in the Size  
box, click Custom. When the Custom Page  
Size window appears, set the size and click  
OK. The setting appears on the list so that  
you can select it.  
Enter the custom name  
you want to use.  
Enter the paper size.  
4.6  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Property  
Source  
Description  
Make sure that Source is set to the  
appropriate paper tray.  
3
Use the Manual Feed source when printing  
to special material. You need to load one  
sheet at a time into the Multipurpose tray. See  
page 3.8.  
If you install an optional Tray 2 and set the  
Tray 2 in printer properties (see page E.12),  
you can select Tray2  
.
If the paper source is set to Auto Select, the  
machine automatically picks up print material  
in the following order: the Multipurpose tray,  
Tray 1, and optional Tray 2.  
4
Make sure that Type is set to Printer  
Default. If you load a different type of print  
material, select the corresponding paper type.  
For more information about print materials,  
see Chapter 3, Paper Handling.  
4
Type  
If you use cotton paper, set the paper type to  
Thick for the best printing.  
To use recycled paper, which weighs from  
75g/m2 to 90g/m2 (20lb to 24lb), or colored  
paper, select Color Paper  
.
This property allows you to print the first page  
using a different paper type from the rest of  
the document. You can select the paper  
source for the first page.  
5
First Page  
For example, load thick stock for the first  
page into the Multipurpose tray, and plain  
paper into Tray1. Then, select Tray1 in the  
Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in  
the First Page option.  
Scaling allows you to automatically or  
manually scale your print job on a page.  
6
Scaling  
You can choose from None Fit to Page, and  
,
Reduce/Enlarge. For details, see  
page 4.16~4.17.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Graphic Tab  
Use the following options to adjust the print quality for your  
specific printing needs. See page 4.2 for more information about  
accessing printer properties.  
Click the Graphics tab to display the properties shown below.  
1
2
3
4
Property  
Description  
You can select the printing resolution by  
1
2
Resolution  
choosing from 1200 dpi [Best] 600 dpi  
,
[Normal], or 300 dpi [Draft]. The higher  
the setting, the sharper the printed  
characters and graphics. Higher settings  
may increase the time it takes to print a  
document.  
Some printed characters or images appear  
to have jagged or uneven edges. Set this  
Image Mode option to improve the print  
quality of your text and image, and make  
the characters and images appear smoother.  
Image  
Mode  
Printer Setting: When you select this  
option, this feature is determined by the  
setting you’ve made on the control panel  
of the machine, affecting print quality  
accordingly.  
Normal: This setting prints images in the  
normal mode.  
Text Enhance: This setting refines the  
print quality of characters by smoothing  
out jagged edges that can occur on the  
angles and curves of each character.  
Image Enhance: This setting refines  
the print quality of photo images.  
4.8  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Property  
Description  
Selecting this option extends the life of your  
toner cartridge and reduces your cost per  
page without a significant reduction in the  
print quality.  
3
Toner Save  
Mode  
Printer Setting: When you select this  
option, the Toner Save feature is  
determined by the setting you’ve made on  
the control panel of the machine affecting  
print quality accordingly.  
On: Select this option to allow the  
machine to use less toner on each page.  
Off: When you do not need to save toner  
to print a document, select this option.  
4
You can use advanced settings by clicking  
the TrueType Options button.  
4
TrueType  
Options  
TrueType Options  
This option determines how the driver tells  
the machine to image the text in your  
document. Select the appropriate setting  
according to the status of your document.  
Download as Outline: When this  
option is selected, the driver will  
download any TrueType fonts that are  
used in your document that are not  
already stored (resident) in your  
machine. If, after printing a document,  
you find that the fonts did not print  
correctly, choose Download as Bit  
Image and resubmit your print job. The  
Download as Bit Image setting is  
often useful when printing Adobe.  
Download as Bit Image: When this  
option is selected, the driver downloads  
the font data as bitmap images.  
Documents with complicated fonts, such  
as Korean or Chinese, or various other  
types of fonts, print faster in this  
setting.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Property  
Description  
4
TrueType  
Options  
(continued)  
Print as Graphics: When this option  
is selected, the driver downloads any  
fonts as graphics. When printing  
documents with high graphic content  
and relatively few TrueType fonts,  
printing performance (speed) may be  
enhanced in this setting.  
Print All Text Black  
When the Print All Text Black option is  
checked, all text in your document prints in  
solid black, regardless of the color it  
appears on the screen. When this option is  
not checked, colored text prints in shades  
of gray.  
Extras Tab  
See page 4.2 for more information about accessing printer  
properties. Click the Extras tab to access the following features:  
1
2
3
Option  
Description  
You can create a background image of text  
to print on each page of your document. See  
“Using Watermarks” on page 4.18.  
1
Watermark  
4.10  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Option  
Description  
Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. See  
“Using Overlays” on page 4.21.  
2
3
Overlay  
Print Order: You can set the sequence for  
the pages to print. Select the print order  
from the drop-down list.  
Output  
Options  
Normal: Your machine prints all pages  
from the first page to the last page.  
Reverse All Pages: Your machine  
prints all pages from the last page to the  
first page.  
Print Odd Pages: Your machine prints  
only the odd numbered pages of the  
document.  
Print Even Pages: Your machine prints  
only the even numbered pages of the  
document.  
4
Use Printer Fonts: When this option is  
selected, the machine uses the fonts that  
are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to  
print your document, rather than  
downloading the fonts used in your  
document. Because downloading fonts takes  
time, selecting this option can speed up  
your printing time.  
Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the  
version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,  
you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.  
See page 4.2 for more information about accessing printer  
properties.  
Printer Tab  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view the Printer tab. Click the Printer tab to access the  
following properties:  
Optional Tray: If you install an optional Tray 2, in the printer  
properties window, you can tell the machine to recognize and  
use it for PC-printing by selecting Tray 2 in the Optional  
Tray drop down list.  
High Altitude Correction: If your machine is going to be  
used at an altitude above 1,500 m, checking this option will  
optimize the print quality for those circumstances.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using a Favorite Setting  
The Favorites option, available on each tab, except for the  
About tab, allows you to save the current properties settings for  
future use.  
To save a Favorites item:  
1
2
Change the settings on each tab, as needed.  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
3
Click Save.  
To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop-down  
list.  
To delete a favorite setting item, select it from the list and click  
Delete  
.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting Printer Default from the list.  
Using Help  
Your machine has a help screen that can be activated using the  
Help button in the printer properties window. The help screen  
gives detailed information about the printer features provided  
by the printer driver.  
You can also click  
in the upper right hand corner, and then  
click on any setting.  
4.12  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing Multiple Pages on One  
Sheet of Paper  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of  
paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages are  
reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can  
print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
1
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
2
From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side  
from the Type drop-down list.  
4
NOTE: This feature is not available when you select Fit to Page  
or Reduce/Enlarge from the Paper tab.  
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (1,  
2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) on the Pages per Side drop-down list.  
4
Select the page order on the Page Order drop-down list, if  
necessary.  
Down,  
Then Right  
Right, Then  
Down  
Left, Then  
Down  
Down, Then  
Left  
PRINTING TASKS 4.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
NOTE  
:
Page Order and Print Page Border are enabled only  
when the number of pages per side is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16.  
5
6
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
Printing Posters  
You can print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of  
paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form  
one poster-sized document.  
1
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
2
From the Layout tab, select Poster on the Type drop-  
down list.  
NOTE: This feature is not available when you select Fit to Page  
or Reduce/Enlarge from the Paper tab.  
4.14  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Configure the poster option:  
You can select the page layout from 2x2 3x3, 4x4, or  
,
Custom. If you select 2x2, the image is automatically  
stretched to cover 4 physical pages.  
2 x 2  
3 x 3  
4
If you select Custom, you can manually set the scale rate  
of the image in the Scale Factor input box.  
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier  
to reconstruct the resulting poster.  
0.15 inches  
0.15 inches  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by pasting the sheets together.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fitting Your Document to a Selected  
Paper Size  
You can scale your print job to any paper size regardless of the  
original document size. This can be useful when you want to  
check the fine details on a small document.  
A
1
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
2
From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page on the Type drop-  
down list.  
NOTE: This feature is not available when you select Poster or  
Multiple Pages per Side from the Layout tab.  
3
Select the correct size from the Target Page drop-down  
list.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source and type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
4.16  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing a Reduced or Enlarged  
Document  
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or  
smaller on the printed page.  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge on the Type  
drop-down list.  
4
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
You can also click the  
or  
button.  
NOTE: This feature is not available when you select Poster or  
Multiple Pages per Side from the Layout tab.  
4
5
Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and  
type.  
Click OK and print the document.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Watermarks  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray letters  
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across  
the first page or all of the pages of a document.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with your  
machine, and they can be modified or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
1
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
2
Click the Extras tab and select a watermark on the  
Watermark drop-down list. It appears in the preview  
image window.  
Preview  
image  
3
Click OK and start printing.  
4.18  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Creating a Watermark  
1
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
2
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Watermark  
section. The Edit Watermark window appears.  
4
3
4
Enter the text message you want to print in the  
Watermark Message box.  
The message displays in the preview image window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only  
.
Select the watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style, size, and gray scale  
level from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of  
the watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add the new watermark to the list.  
When you finish creating, click OK and start printing.  
To stop printing the watermark, select [No Watermark] on the  
Watermark drop-down list.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Editing a Watermark  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Watermark  
section. The Edit Watermark window appears.  
Select the watermark you want to edit on the Current  
Watermarks list. You can change the watermark message  
and the options. Refer to page 4.19.  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
Click OK  
.
Deleting a Watermark  
1
2
3
4
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
From the Extras tab, click Edit in the Watermark section.  
The Edit Watermark window appears.  
Select the watermark you want to delete on the Current  
Watermarks list and click Delete  
.
Click OK  
.
4.20  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Overlays  
What is an Overlay?  
An overlay is text and/or images stored on the computer hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you need only tell  
the machine to print the letterhead overlay on your document.  
Dear ABC  
Regards  
WORLD BEST  
4
Creating a New Page Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a page overlay  
containing a logo or image.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you  
wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.  
WORLD BEST  
2
3
To save the document as an overlay, access printer  
properties. See page 4.2.  
Click the Extras tab and click Edit in the Overlay section.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.  
5
In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight  
characters in the File name box. Select the destination  
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
Click OK or Yes to finish creating.  
The file is not printed out. Instead it is stored in your  
computer HDD disk.  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay.  
4.22  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Page Overlay  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
To change the print settings from your software application,  
access printer properties. See page 4.2.  
3
4
Click the Extras tab.  
Select the overlay you want to print from the Overlay  
drop-down list box.  
4
5
If the overlay file you want doesn’t appear on the Overlay  
List, click Edit and Load Overlay, and select the overlay  
file.  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
this Load Overlay window.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears on the  
Overlay List and is available for printing. Select the overlay  
from the Overlay List box.  
6
If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing. When this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on the  
document.  
Answering Yes in the window means that the selected  
overlay prints with your document. Answering No to the  
window cancels overlay printing.  
If this box is empty and an overlay has been selected, the  
overlay will be automatically printed with your document.  
7
Click OK or Yes until the printing starts.  
The overlay downloads with your print job and prints on  
your document.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the same  
as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
4.24  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
1
2
3
In the printer properties window, click the Extras tab.  
Click Edit in the Overlay section.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List  
box.  
4
5
6
Click Delete Overlay.  
When a confirmation message window appears, click Yes  
.
4
Click OK until you exit the Print window.  
PRINTING TASKS 4.25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
4.26  
PRINTING TASKS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COPYING  
5
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying  
documents.  
This chapter includes:  
• Loading Paper for Copying  
• Selecting the Paper Tray  
• Preparing a Document  
• Making Copies on the Document Glass  
Feeder  
• Setting Copy Options  
• Using Special Copy Features  
• Changing the Default Settings  
• Setting the Time Out Option  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading Paper for Copying  
The instructions for loading print materials are the same  
whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For further details,  
see page 2.7 for loading in the paper tray and page 3.6 for  
loading in the Multipurpose tray.  
NOTE For copying, you can only use Letter-, A4-, Legal-,  
:
Folio-, Executive-, B5-, A5-, or A6-sized print materials.  
Selecting the Paper Tray  
After loading the print media for copy output, you have to select  
the paper tray you will use for the copy job.  
1
Press Menu on the control panel.  
The first available menu item, “Paper Setting,appears on  
the top line of the display and “Copy Tray” appears on the  
bottom line of the display.  
2
3
Press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the paper tray you  
want appears on the display.  
You can select Tray1, Tray2, MP Tray, Tray1/2, or Auto. If  
you do not install the optional Tray 2, the Tray2 and Tray1/  
2 menu item will not appear on the display.  
4
5
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
5.2  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preparing a Document  
You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document  
Feeder (ADF) to load an original document for copying,  
scanning, and sending a fax. Using the ADF, you can load up to  
2
50 documents (47 ~ 105 g/m , 12.5 ~ 28 lb) for one job. You  
can, of course, place only one sheet at a time on the document  
glass.  
When you use the ADF:  
• Do not load documents smaller than 142 x 127 mm or  
larger than 216 x 356 mm.  
• Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
5
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading  
documents.  
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is  
completely dry before loading documents.  
• Do not load documents that include different sizes or  
weights of paper.  
• Do not load booklet, pamphlet, transparencies, or  
documents having other unusual characteristics.  
COPYING  
5.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Making Copies on the Document  
Glass  
1
Lift and open the document cover.  
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and  
align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of  
the glass.  
NOTE: Make sure that no documents are in the ADF (Automatic  
Document Feeder). If a document is detected in the ADF, the  
machine gives it priority over the document on the document  
glass.  
3
Close the document cover.  
NOTES  
:
• Leaving the cover open while copying may affect copy quality  
and toner consumption.  
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover  
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the  
cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start  
copying with the cover open.  
5.4  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Customize the copy settings including number of copies,  
copy size, darkness, and original type, by using the control  
panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on page 5.7.  
To clear the settings, use the Stop/Clear button.  
5
6
If necessary, you can use special copy features, such as  
Poster, Auto Fit, Clone, and 2Sides on 1pg copying.  
Press Start to begin copying.  
The display shows the copy processing.  
NOTES  
:
• You can cancel the copy job during an operation. Press Stop/  
Clear, and the copying will stop.  
• Dust on the document glass may cause black spots on the  
printout. Always keep it clean.  
To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled  
images, use the document glass.  
5
Making Copies from the Automatic  
Document Feeder  
1
Load the document face up into the ADF (Automatic  
Document Feeder). You can insert up to 50 sheets at a  
time. Make sure that the bottom of the document stack  
matches the paper size marked on the document tray.  
COPYING  
5.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
Adjust the document guides to the document size.  
3
Customize the copy settings including number of copies,  
copy size, darkness, and original type, by using the control  
panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on page 5.7.  
To clear the settings, use the Stop/Clear button.  
4
5
If necessary, you can use special copy features, such as  
Collation and 2 or 4 Up-copying.  
Press Start to begin copying.  
The display shows the copy processing.  
NOTE: Dust on the ADF glass may cause black lines on the  
printout. Always keep it clean.  
5.6  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Copy Options  
The buttons on the control panel let you select all basic copy  
options: darkness, document type, copy size, and number of  
copies. Set the following options for the current copy job before  
pressing Start to make copies.  
NOTE: If you press Stop/Clear while setting the copy options, all  
of the options you have set for the current copy job will be  
canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will  
automatically return to their default status after the machine  
completes the copy in progress.  
Darkness  
If you have an original document containing faint markings and  
dark images, you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that  
is easier to read.  
5
To adjust the contrast, press Darkness  
.
Each time you press the button, the LED labeled with the  
selected mode lights.  
You can choose from the following contrast modes:  
Light: works well with dark print.  
Normal: works well with standard typed or printed  
documents.  
Dark: works well with light print or faint pencil markings.  
Original Type  
The Original Type setting is used to improve the copy quality by  
selecting the document type for the current copy job.  
To select the document type, press Original Type  
.
Each time you press the button, the LED labeled with the  
selected mode lights.  
You can choose from the following image modes:  
Text: Use for documents containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for documents with mixed text and  
photographs.  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
NOTE: When you copy a document containing color on the  
background, such as a newspaper or a catalog, the background will  
appear on your copy. If you want to reduce the background,  
change the Darkness setting to Light and/or the Original Type  
setting to Text  
.
COPYING  
5.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Reduced/Enlarged Copy  
Using the Reduce/Enlarge button, you can reduce or enlarge  
the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% when you copy  
original documents from the document glass or from 25% to  
100% from the ADF. Note that the zoom rate available is  
different depending on the document loading method.  
To select from the predefined copy sizes:  
1
Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
The default setting appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
2
3
Press Reduce/Enlarge or the scroll button ( or ) to find  
the size setting you want.  
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To fine-tune the size of copies:  
1
2
Press Reduce/Enlarge.  
Press Reduce/Enlarge or the scroll button ( or )  
until “Custom:25-100%” or “Custom:25-400%” displays  
on the bottom line. Press Enter  
.
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the copy size you want  
appears on the display.  
Pressing and holding the button allows you to quickly scroll  
to the number you want.  
For the SCX-4720F/4720FS, you can enter the value using  
the number keypad.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at  
the bottom of your copy.  
5.8  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Number of Copies  
Using the No. of Copies button, you can select the number of  
copies from 1 to 99.  
1
2
Press No. of Copies.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the number you want  
appears on the display.  
Pressing and holding the button allows you to quickly scroll  
to the number you want.  
For the SCX-4720F/4720FS, you can enter the value using  
the number keypad.  
3
Press Enter to save the selection.  
5
Using Special Copy Features  
You can use the following copy features using the Special Copy  
button on the control panel:  
Off: Prints in normal mode.  
Clone Prints multiple image copies from the original  
:
document on a single page. The number of images is  
automatically determined by the original image and paper  
size. See page 5.10.  
Copy Collate: Sorts the copy job. For example, if you make  
2 copies of a 3 page document, one complete 3 page  
document will print followed by the second complete  
document. See page 5.10.  
Auto Fit: Automatically reduces or enlarges the original  
image to fit on the paper currently loaded in the machine.  
See page 5.11.  
2 sides in 1pg  
sheet of paper. See page 5.11.  
:
Prints 2-sided original document on one  
2
/4 Up: Prints 2/4 original images reduced to fit onto one  
sheet of paper. See page 5.12.  
Poster: Prints an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3x3). You  
can paste the printed pages together to make one poster-  
sized document. See page 5.13.  
NOTE: Some features may not be available depending on where  
you loaded the document, on the document glass or in the  
Automatic Document Feeder.  
COPYING  
5.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Clone Copying  
This special copy feature can be applied only when you place a  
document on the document glass. If a document is detected in  
the ADF, Clone copying feature does not work.  
1
Place the document to be copied on the document glass,  
and close the cover.  
2
3
Press Special Copy.  
Press Special Copy or the scroll button ( or ) until  
“Clone” displays on the bottom line.  
4
5
Press Enter to make your selection.  
If necessary, customize the copy settings, including  
number of copies, darkness, and original type, by using the  
control panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on  
page 5.7.  
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/  
Enlarge button while making a clone copy.  
6
Press Start begin copying.  
Collation Copying  
This special copy feature is available only when you load  
documents in the ADF.  
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
Load the documents to be copied in the ADF.  
Press Special Copy  
.
Press Special Copy or the scroll button ( or ) until  
“Copy Collate” displays on the bottom line.  
4
5
Press Enter to make your selection.  
If necessary, customize the copy settings, including  
number of copies, darkness, and original type, by using the  
control panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on  
page 5.7.  
6
Press Start to begin copying.  
5.10  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Auto Fit Copying  
This special copy feature can be applied only when you place a  
document on the document glass. If a document is detected in  
the ADF, Auto Fit copying does not work.  
A
1
Place the document to be copied on the document glass,  
and close the cover.  
2
3
Press Special Copy.  
Press Special Copy or the scroll button ( or ) until “Auto  
Fit” appears on the bottom line.  
4
5
Press Enter to make your selection.  
If necessary, customize the copy settings, including  
number of copies, darkness, and original type, by using the  
control panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on  
page 5.7.  
5
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/  
Enlarge button while Auto Fit copying is enabled.  
6
Press Start to begin copying.  
2 Sides on 1 Page Copying  
You can copy a 2-sided document on one side of one page of  
A4-, Letter-, Legal-, Folio-, Executive-, B5-, A5-, or A6-sized  
paper.  
When you copy using this feature, the machine prints one side  
of the document on the upper half of the paper and the other  
side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.  
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized document, such  
as a name card.  
If the original document is larger than the printable area, some  
portions may not be printed.  
This special copy feature can be applied only when you place a  
document on the document glass. If a document is detected in  
the ADF, 2 Sides on 1 Page copying feature does not work.  
1
2
Place the document to be copied on the document glass  
and close the cover.  
Press Special Copy  
.
COPYING  
5.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Press Special Copy or the scroll button ( or ) until “2  
sides in 1pg” displays on the bottom line.  
4
5
Press Enter to make your selection.  
If necessary, customize the copy settings, including  
number of copies, darkness, and original type, by using the  
control panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on  
page 5.7.  
6
7
Press Start to begin copying.  
Your machine begins scanning the front side.  
When “Set Backside” displays on the bottom line, open the  
document cover and flip the document over. Close the  
cover.  
NOTE: If you press the Stop/Clear button or if no buttons are  
pressed for approximately 30 seconds, the machine cancels the  
copy job and returns to Standby mode.  
8
Press Start again.  
2 Up or 4 Up Copying  
This copy feature is available only when you load documents in  
the ADF.  
1
2
3
Load the documents to be copied in the ADF.  
Press Special Copy  
.
2-up copying  
Press Special Copy or the scroll button ( or ) until “2  
UP” or “4 UP” displays on the bottom line.  
1
3
2
4
4
5
Press Enter to make your selection.  
If necessary, customize the copy settings, including  
number of copies, darkness, and original type, by using the  
control panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on  
page 5.7.  
4-up copying  
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/  
Enlarge button for making a 2 or 4 Up copy.  
6
Press Start to begin copying.  
5.12  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Poster Copying  
This special copy feature can be applied only when you place a  
document on the document glass. If a document is detected in  
the ADF, the Poster copying feature does not work.  
1
Place the document to be copied on the document glass  
and close the cover.  
2
3
Press Special Copy.  
Press Special Copy or the scroll button ( or ) until  
“Poster” displays on the bottom line.  
4
5
Press Enter to make your selection.  
If necessary, customize the copy settings, including  
number of copies, darkness, and original type, by using the  
control panel buttons. See “Setting Copy Options” on  
page 5.7.  
5
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/  
Enlarge button when making a poster.  
6
Press Start to begin copying.  
Your original document is divided into 9  
portions. Each portion is scanned and  
printed one by one in the following order:  
COPYING  
5.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Default Settings  
The copy options, including darkness, original type, copy size  
and number of copies, can be set to the most frequently used  
modes. When you copy a document, the default settings are  
used unless they are changed by using the corresponding  
buttons on the control panel.  
To create your own default settings:  
1
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first menu item, “Default-Change,appears on the  
bottom line.  
2
3
4
5
Press Enter to access the menu item. The first setup  
option, “Darkness,appears on the bottom line.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the setup  
options.  
When the option you want to set appears, press Enter to  
access the option.  
Change the setting using the scroll button ( or ).  
For the SCX-4720F/4720FS, you can enter the value using  
the number keypad.  
6
7
8
Press Enter to save the selection.  
Repeat steps 3 through 6, as needed.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
NOTE: While you are setting copy options, pressing Stop/Clear  
cancels the changed settings and restores their default status.  
5.14  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Time Out Option  
You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the  
default copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing  
them on the control panel.  
1
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Copy Setup”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Timeout” on the  
bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu item.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the status you want  
appears on the display.  
5
You can select from 15, 30, 60, 120, and 180 (seconds).  
Selecting “Off” means that the machine does not restore  
the default settings until you press Start to begin copying,  
or Stop/Clear to cancel.  
5
6
Press Enter to make your selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
COPYING  
5.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MEMO  
5.16  
COPYING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCANNING  
6
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text  
into digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or  
e-mail the files, display them on your web site or use them  
to create projects that you can print using Samsung  
SmarThru software or the WIA driver. You can also buy  
optional network card and the Network Scan program to  
scan (SCX-4720F/4720FS only).  
This chapter includes:  
• Scanning Basics  
• Scanning From the Control Panel to an Application  
• Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru  
• Scanning Using the WIA Driver  
• Scanning to USB Flash Drive  
• Scanning Using the Network Scan (SCX-4720F/  
4720FS Only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning Basics  
Your SCX-4x20 Series offers four ways to scan. These are:  
• From the control panel on your machine to an application:  
Use the Scan-to button on the control panel to initiate  
scanning. Assign the TWAIN-compliant software, such as  
Adobe Photo Deluxe or Adobe Photoshop, to the machine  
by selecting it from the list of available applications via the  
Scan-to button. Before assigning the software program,  
you must configure the scan list using the Printer Settings  
Utility. For details, see page 2.37.  
• From the Samsung SmarThru software: Launch Samsung  
SmarThru and open Scan To to begin scanning. See  
page 6.4.  
• From the Windows Images Acquisition (WIA) driver: Your  
machine also supports the WIA driver for scanning  
images. See page 6.7.  
• From a USB flash drive: When you insert a USB flash drive  
into the USB port in the front of your machine, you can  
scan and save documents in the USB flash drive by  
pressing Scan-to. For details, see page 6.8.  
• From the optional Network Scan Program (SCX-4720F/  
4720FS only): Your machine use the Network Scan  
program for scanning images. See page 6.9.  
NOTES  
:
To scan with your machine, you must install the MFP driver.  
• Scanning is done through the same LPT or USB port currently  
assigned for your printer port.  
6.2  
SCANNING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning From the Control Panel  
to an Application  
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
3
4
Press Scan-to. The first available menu item,  
“Application,appears on the bottom line.  
Press Enter and press the scroll button ( or ) to select  
an application to which you want to send the scanned  
image.  
5
Press Start. The selected application window opens. Adjust  
the scan settings and start scan. For details, please refer to  
the User’s Guide of the application.  
6
SCANNING  
6.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru  
Samsung SmarThru is the accompanying software for your  
machine. With SmarThru, scanning is the proverbial piece of  
cake.  
NOTE: SmarThru 4 does not support Windows 95.  
Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru:  
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
3
Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru, you will see  
the SmarThru 4 icon on your desktop. Double-click the  
SmarThru 4 icon.  
Double-click this icon.  
The SmarThru 4 window opens.  
•Scan To  
Allows you to scan an image and save it to an application  
or folder, email it, or publish it on a web site.  
•Image  
Allows you to edit an image you have saved as a graphic  
file and send it to a selected application or folder, email it,  
or publish it on a web site.  
6.4  
SCANNING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
•Copy  
Allows you to produce professional quality copies. You can  
make black and white or color copies of an image if your  
machine supports it, and customize the copy settings.  
•Print  
Allows you to print images you have saved. You can print  
images in black and white or color mode if your machine  
supports it.  
4
Click Scan To. The Scan To menu bar appears on the  
SmarThru 4 window.  
Scan To  
menu bar  
Adjust the  
scan settings.  
6
Click to start  
scanning.  
Scan To lets you use the following services:  
•Application  
Scanning an image and placing it in an image editor  
application, such as Paint or Adobe PhotoShop.  
•E-mail  
Scanning an image and emailing it. Allows you to scan an  
image, preview it, and email it.  
NOTE: To send an image by e-mail, you must have a mail client  
program, like Outlook Express, which has been set up with your e-  
mail account.  
•Folder  
Scanning an image and saving it to a folder. Allows you to  
scan an image, preview it, and save it to the folder of your  
choice.  
SCANNING  
6.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•OCR  
Scanning an image and performing text recognition.  
Allows you to scan an image, preview it, and send it to the  
OCR program for text recognition.  
- Recommended Scan Option for OCR  
- Resolution: 200 or 300 dpi  
- Image Type: Grayscale or Black & White  
•Web  
Scanning an image, previewing it, and publishing it on a  
web site, using the specified file format for the image you  
want to publish.  
•Settings  
Customizing settings of Scan To basic functions. Allows  
you to customize settings for Application E-mail, OCR,  
,
and Web functions.  
5
6
Click the service icon according to your job.  
SmarThru 4 opens for the selected service. Adjust the  
scan settings.  
7
To start scanning, click Scan.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, click Cancel  
.
Using Onscreen Help File  
For more information about SmarThru, click  
at the top right  
corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and  
allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru  
program.  
6.6  
SCANNING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning Using the WIA Driver  
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard  
components provided by Microsoft  
Windows  
XP and works  
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the  
WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images  
without using additional software.  
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP and USB port.  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
From the Start menu on your desktop window, select  
Settings  
,
Control Panel, and then Scanners and  
Cameras  
.
6
3
4
Double click your machine icon. The Scanner and Camera  
Wizard launches.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see how your preferences affect the picture.  
5
Click Next.  
SCANNING  
6.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
7
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and  
destination to save the picture.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it  
is copied to your computer.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Stop/Clear  
button on the control panel.  
Scanning to USB Flash Drive  
Using a USB flash drive, you can scan and save documents in  
the USB flash drive by pressing Scan-to on the control panel.  
For details about scanning, see “Scanning to USB Flash Drive”  
on page 10.3.  
6.8  
SCANNING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning Using the Network Scan  
(SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)  
About Network Scan  
NOTE: To use this function, you need to purchase and install an  
optional network interface card and configure the network  
settings. For details, see “Installing a Network Interface Card” on  
page E.6.  
Network Scan allows you to scan a document on your machine  
as a JPEG, TIFF or PDF and save it to a network-connected  
computer.  
To use this feature, you must install the Network Scan program  
on the computer. For details about installing the program, see  
below.  
Installing the Network Scan Program  
NOTE: The Network Scan Program is supported only on Windows  
system.  
6
1
Insert an optional Samsung Network Scan CD-ROM into  
your CD-ROM drive.  
The Samsung Network Scan CD-ROM should automatically  
run, and an installation window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter  
of your drive and click OK  
.
2
3
4
Select the language you want to install, and click OK  
.
When the installation window opens, click Next  
.
Installation starts automatically started and the Samsung  
Network Scan Manager program opens.  
5
Installation finishes and the Samsung Network Scan  
Manager window opens.  
NOTE: For information about the Samsung Network Scan  
Manager, refer to the Network Scan User’s Guide. You can select  
Start  
Network Scan  
Programs  
Samsung Network Printer Utilities  
View User Guide  
.
SCANNING  
6.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Setting the Network Scan Option  
If you installed an optional network interface card, your machine  
automatically recognize it and the “Network Scan menu is added  
to the control panel menu settings. From this menu, you can enable  
or disable scanning on your machine via a network-connected  
computer.  
1
2
3
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Network  
Scan” on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ), to select “Enable” or  
“Disable.  
Select “Enable” to use the Network Scan option. This is the  
default setting.  
Select “Disable” it you do not want to use the Network  
Scan option.  
4
Press Enter to complete your selection.  
Scanning Using Network Scan  
Using Network Scan you can scan a document from your  
machine to your computer through the network.  
If you use SmarThru, you must initiate the scan procedure from  
the computer. Scanned data will go only to the computer which  
is directly connected to the machine.  
Scanned documents can be saved as JPEG, TIFF or PDF files. You  
can also secure the scanned files by entering a user name and  
authentication code (PIN) via the number keypad on the front of  
your machine.  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
Press Scan-to and select Network Scan. “Select User ID:”  
appears on the display.  
6.10  
SCANNING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Enter your ID and password using the number keypad, and  
then press Enter  
.
There are several different ways to provide a user ID:  
•Enter full user ID through the keypad, or  
•In Smart Search, enter characters in the top line of the  
LCD display and the bottom line will display the User IDs  
that begin with the entered character(s). “No Matches”  
displays in the lower line if no entries starting with the  
entered character are found. You can press Enter key and  
browse through the entries in the lower line starting with  
the entered character in the upper line by using the scroll  
button ( or ). You can press Upper Level button while  
browsing and enter the User ID through the keypad.  
4
Enter your PIN to prevent other users from sending  
scanned documents to your computer. Press Enter. You  
can select the default password option to avoid this menu.  
5
6
Press the scroll buttons ( or ) until “Scan Data” appears  
on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Choose the file type and resolution and then press Enter  
.
Black & White: If you select this option, select file type  
PDF or TIFF  
6
.
Color JPEG-200: If you select this option, 200 dpi  
resolution and JPEG file type will be automatically  
selected.  
Resolution: Select resolutions of 100 dpi, 200 dpi or 300  
dpi.  
NOTE: When you edit an image which has been scanned in  
100 dpi resolution, the image may differ from the original image,  
depending on the program you use.  
7
Press the scroll buttons ( or ) until “Start Scanning”  
displays and press Enter  
.
If you press Enter when the display shows “Logout, your  
machine returns to the Standby mode.  
8
The document will be scanned to the computer where the  
Network Scan program is running.  
If you have chosen TIFF or PDF as the file type, the  
display asks if you want to scan another document. If you  
need to scan more than one document, select “Yes” using  
the scroll button ( or ) and press Enter. The next  
document is scanned and stored. Repeat this until all  
documents have been scanned then select “No.  
SCANNING  
6.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Network Scan Timeout  
If Network Scan on your computer does not send a refresh  
request and does not scan a job within the timeout period  
configured in Network Scan, the entry your machine returns to  
the Standby mode.  
To set the Network Scan timeout option:  
1
2
3
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll buttons until “Scan Timeout” appears on  
the bottom line and then press Enter  
.
Enter the desired timeout value and press Enter  
.
The default value is 30 minutes. Users can enter any value  
from 1 minute to 1,440 minutes.  
4
The change will be broadcast over the network and  
effective to all clients connected to the network.  
6.12  
SCANNING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
7
The fax feature is only available on the SCX-4720F/  
your machine as a fax machine.  
• Sending a Fax  
• Receiving a Fax  
• Automatic Dialing  
• Other Ways to Fax  
• Additional Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up the Fax  
System  
Changing the Fax Setup options  
1
Press Menu until “Fax Setup” appears on the top line of the  
display.  
The first available menu item, “Receive Mode,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the desired  
menu item on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Use the scroll button ( or ) to find the desired status or  
use the number keypad to enter the value for the option  
you have selected.  
4
Press Enter to make your selection. The next Fax Setup  
option appears.  
5
6
If necessary, repeat steps 2 through 4.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
7.2  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Available Fax Setup Options  
Option  
Description  
You can select the default fax receiving mode.  
• In Tel mode, you can receive a fax by  
picking up the handset of the extension  
phone and then pressing the remote receive  
code (see page 7.4). Alternatively, you can  
press On Hook Dial (you can hear a fax  
tone from the remote machine) and then  
press Start on the control panel of your  
machine.  
• In the Fax mode, the machine answers an  
incoming call and immediately goes into  
fax reception mode.  
Receive Mode  
• In Ans/Fax mode, the answering machine  
answers an incoming call, and the caller can  
leave a message on the answering machine.  
If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the  
line, the call automatically switches to Fax  
mode.  
• In DRPD mode, you can receive a call using  
the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) feature. This option is available only  
when you set up the DRPD Mode. For further  
details, see page 7.17.  
7
You can specify the number of times the  
machine rings, from 1 to 7, before answering  
an incoming call.  
Ring To  
Answer  
You can select the default contrast mode to fax  
your documents lighter or darker.  
Light works well with dark print.  
Normal works well with standard typed or  
printed documents.  
Darkness  
Dark works well with light print or faint  
pencil markings.  
Your machine can automatically redial a remote  
fax machine if it was busy. Intervals from 1 to  
15 minutes can be entered.  
Redial Term  
Redials  
You can specify the number of redial attempts,  
from 0 to 13. If you enter  
not redial.  
0, the machine will  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Option  
Description  
You can set your machine to print a report  
showing whether a transmission was  
successful, how many pages were sent, and  
MSG Confirm  
more. The available options are On Off, and  
,
On-Err, which prints only when a transmission  
is not successful.  
This produces a report with detailed  
information about the previous 50  
communications operations, including time and  
Auto Report  
dates. The available options are On or Off  
.
When receiving a document containing pages  
as long as or longer than the paper loaded in  
the paper tray, the machine can reduce the size  
of the document to fit the size of the paper  
loaded in the machine. Select On if you want to  
automatically reduce an incoming page.  
Auto  
Reduction  
With this feature set to Off, the machine  
cannot reduce the document to fit onto one  
page. The document will be divided and printed  
in actual size on two or more pages.  
When receiving a document containing pages  
as long as or longer than the paper installed in  
your machine, you can set the machine to  
discard any excess at the bottom of the page. If  
the received page is outside the margin you  
set, it will print in actual size on two or more  
sheets of paper.  
Discard Size  
When the document is outside the margin and  
the Auto Reduction feature is turned on, the  
machine reduces the document to fit it onto the  
appropriately-sized paper and discard does not  
occur. If the Auto Reduction feature is turned  
off or fails, data outside the margin will be  
discarded. Settings range from 0 to 30 mm.  
The Receive Start Code allows you to initiate  
fax reception from an extension phone plugged  
into the EXT jack on the back of the machine. If  
you pick up the extension phone and hear fax  
tones, enter the Receive Start Code. The  
Receive Start Code is preset to *9* at the  
factory. Settings range from 0 to 9. See  
page 7.16 for more information about using the  
code.  
RCV Start  
Code  
7.4  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Option  
Description  
You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring  
Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature, which  
enables a user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers. In  
this menu, you can set the machine to  
DRPD Mode  
recognize which ring patterns to answer. For  
details about this feature, see page 7.17.  
7
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending a Fax  
Loading a Document  
You can use the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) or the  
document glass to load an original document for faxing. Using  
the ADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper  
at a time. You can, of course, place only one sheet at a time on  
the document glass. For details about preparing a document,  
see page 5.3.  
To fax a document using the Automatic  
Document Feeder (ADF):  
1
Load the document face up into the ADF. You can insert up  
to 50 sheets at a time. Make sure that the bottom of the  
document stack matches the paper size marked on the  
document tray.  
7.6  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
Adjust the document guide on the ADF to match the width  
of the document.  
NOTE: Dust on the ADF glass may cause black lines on the  
printout. Keep it always clean.  
To fax a document from the document glass:  
1
Lift and open the document cover.  
7
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and  
align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of  
the glass.  
NOTE: Make sure that no other documents are in the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder). If a document is detected in the  
ADF, the machine gives it priority over the document on the  
document glass.  
3
Close the document cover.  
NOTES  
:
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover  
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the  
cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start  
copying with the cover open.  
To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled  
images, use the document glass.  
7.8  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Paper Tray  
After loading the print material for fax output, you have to select  
the paper tray you will use for the fax job.  
1
2
Press Menu on the control panel.  
The first available menu, item “Paper Setting,appears on  
the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Fax Tray” appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
3
4
Press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until the paper tray you  
want appears on the display.  
You can select Tray1, Tray2, Tray1/2, or Auto. If you do not  
install the optional Tray 2, the Tray2 and Tray1/2 menu  
item will not appear on the display.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
7
Adjusting the Document Resolution  
The default document settings produce good results when using  
typical text-based documents.  
However, if you send documents that are of a poor quality, or  
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a  
higher quality fax.  
1
2
Press Resolution on the control panel.  
By pressing Resolution or the scroll button ( or ), you  
can choose from Standard, Fine, Super Fine, Photo Fax, and  
Color Fax.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
When the mode you want to use displays, press Enter to  
make your selection.  
The document types recommended for the resolution settings  
are described in the table below:  
Mode  
Recommended for:  
Standard  
Documents with normal sized characters.  
Documents containing small characters or thin  
lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Fine  
Documents containing extremely fine detail.  
Super Fine mode is enabled only if the  
machine with which you are communicating  
also supports the Super Fine resolution. See  
the notes below.  
Super Fine  
Photo Fax  
Color Fax  
Documents containing shades of gray or  
photographs.  
Documents with colors. Sending a color fax is  
enabled only if the machine with which you are  
communicating supports color fax reception  
and you send the fax manually. In this mode,  
memory transmission is not available.  
NOTES  
:
• For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The  
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
• When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax  
machine with which you are communicating does not support  
Super Fine resolution, the machine transmits using the highest  
resolution mode supported by the other fax machine.  
7.10  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Fax Automatically  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
3
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad, speed dial, or group dial  
numbers. For details about storing a number, see  
“Automatic Dialing” on page 7.19.  
4
5
Press Start.  
When a document is placed on the document glass, the  
display shows “Another Page?” on the top line after the  
document is scanned into the memory. If you have the next  
page, remove the scanned page and place the next page on  
the glass and select “1.Yes.” Repeat as necessary.  
7
After all of the pages are scanned, select “2.No” when the  
display shows “Another Page?.”  
6
The number is dialed and then the machine begins sending  
the fax when the receiving fax machine is ready.  
NOTE: When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at  
any time while sending.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending a Fax Manually  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
3
4
Press On Hook Dial. You hear a dial tone.  
Enter the receiving fax machine’s number using the number  
keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad. For details about storing a  
number, see page 7.19.  
5
When you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote  
fax machine, press Start  
.
NOTE: When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at  
any time while sending.  
Redialing the Last Number  
To redial the number you last called:  
Press Redial/Pause  
.
When a document is loaded in the ADF (Automatic Document  
Feeder; see page 7.6), the machine automatically begins to  
send.  
For a document placed on the document glass, the display asks  
if you want to load another page. Select “1.Yes” to add.  
Otherwise, select “2.No.”  
7.12  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Confirming Transmission  
When the last page of your document has been sent  
successfully, the machine beeps and returns to Standby mode.  
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error  
message appears on the display. For a list of error messages and  
their meanings, see page 9.12.  
If you receive an error message, press Stop/Clear to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report  
automatically each time sending a fax is completed. For further  
details, see the MSG Confirm item on page 7.4.  
Automatic Redialing  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer  
when you send a fax, the machine automatically redials the  
number every three minutes, up to seven times according to the  
factory default settings.  
7
When the display shows “Retry Redial ?,” press Enter to redial  
the number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing,  
press Stop/Clear  
.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of  
redial attempts. See page 7.3.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Receiving a Fax  
About Receiving Modes  
• In Fax mode, the machine answers an incoming fax call and  
immediately goes into the fax reception mode.  
• In Tel mode, you can receive a fax by pressing On Hook  
Dial (you can hear a fax tone from the sending machine) and  
then pressing Start on the control panel of your machine.  
You can also pick up the handset of the extension phone and  
then press the remote receive code (see page 7.4).  
• In Ans/Fax mode, the answering machine answers an  
incoming call, and the caller can leave a message on the  
answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax tone on  
the line, the call automatically switches to Fax mode.  
• In DRPD mode, you can receive a call using the Distinctive  
Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature. “Distinctive Ring” is a  
telephone company service which enables a user to use a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone  
numbers. For further details, see page 7.17.  
When your machine’s memory is full, the receiving mode  
automatically switches to Tel.  
For details about changing the receiving mode, see page 7.3.  
NOTES  
:
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the  
EXT jack on the back of your machine.  
• If you do not want other people to view your received  
documents, you can use Secure Receiving mode. In this mode,  
all of the received faxes are stored in memory. For further  
details, see page 7.35.  
7.14  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes  
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same  
whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes  
can only be printed on Letter-, A4-, or Legal-sized paper. For  
details about loading paper and setting the paper size in the  
tray, see page 2.7 and page 2.20.  
Receiving Automatically in Fax  
Mode  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory.  
When you receive a fax, the machine answers the call on a  
To change the number of rings, see page 7.3.  
If you want to adjust the ringer volume, see “Setting Sounds  
(SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)” on page 2.21.  
7
Receiving Manually in Tel Mode  
You can receive a fax call by picking up the handset of the  
extension phone and then pressing the remote receive code  
(see page 7.4), or press On Hook Dial (you can hear a fax tone  
from the sending machine) and then pressing Start on the  
control panel of your machine.  
The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to Standby  
mode when the reception is completed.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Receiving Automatically in Ans/  
Fax Mode  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the  
EXT jack on the back of your machine. See page 2.11.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the  
message as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax  
tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.  
NOTES  
:
• If you have set your machine to Ans/Fax mode and your  
answering machine is switched off, or no answering machine is  
connected to EXT jack, your machine automatically goes into Fax  
mode after a predefined number of rings.  
• If your answering machine has a ‘user-selectable ring counter,  
set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
• If you are in Tel mode (manual reception) when the answering  
machine is connected to your machine, you must switch off the  
answering machine, or the outgoing message from the  
answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
Receiving Manually Using an  
Extension Telephone  
This features works best when you are using an extension  
telephone connected to the EXT jack on the back of your  
machine. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to  
on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax  
tones, press the keys  
9
on the extension telephone. The  
machine receives the document.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax  
tone from the remote machine, try pressing  
9
once again.  
9
is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first  
and the last asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle  
number to whatever you wish. For details about changing the  
code, see page 7.4  
7.16  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD  
Mode  
“Distinctive Ring” is a telephone company service which enables  
a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different  
telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call  
you is identified by different ringing patterns, which consist of  
various combinations of long and short ringing sounds. This  
feature is often used by answering services who answer  
telephones for many different clients and need to know which  
number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax  
machine can “learn” the ring pattern you designate to be  
answered by the fax machine. Unless you change it, this ringing  
pattern will continue to be recognized and answered as a fax  
call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the  
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT  
jack. You can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection at any time.  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option,  
Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line  
by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection, you will need another telephone line at your location,  
or someone available to dial your fax number from outside.  
7
To set up the DRPD mode:  
1
Press Menu until “Fax Setup” appears on the top line of the  
display.  
The first available menu item, “Receive Mode,displays on  
the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “DRPD Mode”  
on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
When “Set” displays on the bottom line, press Enter  
.
“Waiting Ring” appears on the display.  
4
Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not  
necessary to place the call from a fax machine.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call.  
The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
When the machine completes learning, the LCD displays  
“End DRPD Setup.  
If the DRPD setup fails, “DRPD Ring Error” appears. Press  
Enter when “DRPD Mode” displays and retry from step 3.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
When the DRPD feature is set up, the DRPD option is available  
in the Receive Mode menu. To receive faxes in the DRPD mode,  
you need to set the menu to DRPD; see page 7.5.  
NOTES  
:
• DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or  
connect the machine to another telephone line.  
• After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify  
that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call  
placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be  
sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or  
answering machine plugged into the EXT jack.  
Receiving Faxes in the Memory  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive  
faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you receive a  
fax while you are copying or printing, your machine stores  
incoming faxes in memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying  
or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
7.18  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Automatic Dialing  
One-touch Dialing  
The 20 one-touch buttons on the control panel lets you store  
frequently-used fax numbers and dial a number automatically  
with the touch of a button.  
Using the Shift button, you can store up to 40 fax numbers on  
the one-touch buttons.  
Storing a Number for One-touch Dialing  
1
Press and hold one of the one-touch dial buttons for about  
2 seconds.  
If you want to use one-touch dial buttons from 21 to 40,  
press Shift and hold down the one-touch dial button for  
about 2 seconds.  
The display asks you to enter the fax number. T” signifies  
that you are assigning a one-touch dial button.  
7
If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the  
display shows the number to allow you to change it. To  
start over with another one-touch button, press Stop/  
Clear  
.
2
3
Enter the number you want to store using the number  
keypad and press Enter  
.
To insert a pause between numbers, press Redial/Pause  
The symbol “-” appears on the display.  
.
If you make a mistake while entering a number, press the  
button and re-enter the correct number.  
To assign a name to the number, enter the name you want.  
For details about entering characters, see page 2.17.  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4
5
Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To store more numbers, press a one-touch button and  
repeat steps 2 through 4.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Sending a Fax using a One-touch Number  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
3
4
Press the one-touch button where you stored a number.  
The document scans into memory.  
The machine dials the fax number stored in the one-touch  
dial location and the document is sent when the receiving  
fax machine answers.  
7.20  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in one, two,  
or three-digit speed dial locations (0-199).  
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter  
.
3
4
Press Enter when “Speed Dials” appears on the display.  
The display prompts you to enter a location number,  
showing the first available number.  
Enter a speed dial number between 0 and 199, using the  
number keypad or the scroll button ( or ) and press  
Enter  
.
If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the  
display shows the number to allow you to change it. To  
start over with another speed-dial number, press Upper  
Level  
.
7
5
6
Enter the number you want to store using the number  
keypad and press Enter  
.
To insert a pause between numbers, press Redial/Pause  
The symbol “ ” appears on the display.  
To assign a name to the number, enter the name you want.  
For details about entering characters, see page 2.17.  
OR  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
7
8
Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 4 through 7.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending a Fax using a Speed Dial Number  
1
Feed the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
Or  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
3
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
Enter the speed dial number.  
• For a one-digit speed dial number, press and hold the  
appropriate digit button.  
• For a two or three-digit speed dial number, press the first  
digit button(s) and press and hold the last digit button.  
4
5
The corresponding entry’s name briefly displays.  
The document scans into memory.  
When a document is placed on the document glass, the  
LCD display asks if you want to send another page. Select  
“1.Yes” to add more documents or “2.No” to begin sending  
the fax immediately.  
6
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is  
automatically dialed. The document is sent when the  
receiving fax machine answers.  
7.22  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Group Dialing  
If you frequently send the same document to several  
destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and  
set them under a group dial location. This enables you to use a  
group dial number setting to send the same document to all the  
destinations in the group.  
Setting a Group Dial Number  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter  
.
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Group Dials” on  
the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Press Enter when “New” displays on the bottom line.  
The display prompts you to enter a location number,  
showing the first available number.  
5
6
Enter a group number between 0 and 199 using the  
number keypad or the scroll button ( or ) and press  
7
Enter  
.
Press a one-touch dial button or enter a speed dial number  
you want to include in the group and press Enter  
.
You can also select the one-touch dial button or speed dial  
number stored in the machine by pressing the scroll button  
( or ) and then press Enter  
.
7
8
9
When the display confirms the number to be added to the  
group, press Enter  
.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter other one-touch dial or speed  
dial numbers into the group.  
Press the Upper Level button when you have entered all of  
the desired numbers. The display prompts you to enter a  
group ID.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10 To assign a name to the group, enter the name you want.  
For details about entering characters, see page 2.17.  
OR  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
11 Press Enter when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
12 If you want to assign another group, press Enter and  
repeat from step 5.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number in another group  
dial number.  
Editing Group Dial Numbers  
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected  
group or add a new number to the selected group.  
1
2
Press Phone Book on the control panel.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) to display  
“Store&Edit” on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter  
.
3
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Group Dials” on  
the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Edit” on the  
bottom line and press Enter  
.
Enter the group number you want to edit or select the  
group number by pressing the scroll button ( or ) and  
press Enter  
.
6
Press a one-touch dial button or enter the speed dial  
number you want to add or delete.  
You can also select the one-touch dial number or speed dial  
number you want to delete by pressing the scroll button (  
or ).  
7.24  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
8
Press Enter.  
When you enter the specific number in the group, the  
display shows “Delete?.”  
When you enter a new number, the display shows “Add?.”  
9
Press Enter to add or delete the number.  
10 To change the group name, press Upper Level.  
11 Enter a new group name and press Enter.  
12 If you want to edit another group, press Enter and repeat  
from step 5.  
Or  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
(Multi-address Transmission)  
You can use group dialing for Broadcast or Delayed  
transmissions.  
7
Follow the procedure of the operation (Broadcast fax: see  
page 7.28, Delayed fax: see page 7.29, Priority fax: see  
page 7.31). When you come to a step in which the display asks  
you to enter the receiving fax number:  
• For a one-digit group number, press and hold the appropriate  
digit button.  
• For a two or three-digit group number, press the first digit  
button(s) and press and hold the last digit button.  
You can use only one group number for one operation. Then  
continue the procedure to complete the desired operation.  
Your machine automatically scans a document loaded in the  
Automatic Document Feeder or on the document glass into  
memory. The machine dials each of the numbers included in the  
group.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Searching for a Number in Memory  
There are two ways to search for a number in the machine’s  
memory. You can either scan from A to Z sequentially, or you  
can search using the first letter of the name associated with the  
number.  
Searching Sequentially through the Memory  
1
2
3
Press Phone Book.  
Press Enter when “Search&Dial” appears on the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to scroll through the  
machine’s memory until the name and number you want to  
dial display. You can search upwards or downwards through  
the entire memory in alphabetical order, from A to Z.  
While searching through the machine’s memory, you can  
see that each entry is preceded by one of three letters; “T”  
for one-touch dial, “S” for speed dial or “G” for group dial  
numbers. These letters tell you how the number is stored.  
4
When the name and/or the number you want displays,  
press Start or Enter to dial.  
Searching with a Particular First Letter  
1
2
3
Press Phone Book.  
Press Enter when “Search&Dial” appears on the display.  
Press the button labeled with the letter you want to search  
for. A name beginning with the letter displays.  
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE” press  
the  
6
button, which is labeled with “MNO.”  
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the next name.  
When the name and/or the number you want displays,  
press Start or Enter to dial.  
7.26  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing a Phonebook List  
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a  
Phonebook list.  
1
2
Press Phone Book.  
Press Phone Book or the scroll button ( or ) until “Print”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
A list showing your one-touch dial, speed dial, and group  
dial entries prints out.  
7
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Other Ways to Fax  
Sending Broadcast Faxes  
Using the Broadcasting button on the control panel, you can  
use the broadcast fax feature, which allows you to send a  
document to multiple locations. Documents are automatically  
stored in memory and sent to a remote station. After  
transmission, the documents are automatically erased from  
memory.  
1
2
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
3
4
Press Broadcasting on the control panel.  
Enter the number of the first receiving machine using the  
number keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad, speed dial, or group dial  
numbers. For details, see “Automatic Dialing” on page 7.19.  
5
Press Enter to confirm the number. The display asks you to  
enter another fax number to send the document.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have added  
numbers for another broadcast or delay fax job. You must wait  
until the job is completed.  
7.28  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
7
To enter more fax numbers, press  
repeat steps 4 and 5. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
1
to select “Yes” and  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
When you finish entering fax numbers, press  
“No” at the Another No. prompt.  
2
to select  
The document is scanned into memory before transmission.  
The display shows memory capacity and the number of  
pages being stored in memory.  
For a document placed on the document glass, the display  
asks if you want to load another page. Select “1.Yes” to  
add. Otherwise, select “2.No.”  
8
The machine begins sending the document to the numbers  
you entered in the order in which you entered them.  
Sending a Delayed Fax  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you  
will not be present.  
7
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
3
4
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “DelayFax”  
displays on the bottom line.  
Press Enter  
.
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
Enter the number of the receiving machine using the  
number keypad.  
You can use one-touch keypad, speed dial, or group dial  
numbers. For details, see “Automatic Dialing” on page 7.19.  
Press Enter to confirm the number on the display. The  
display asks you to enter another fax number to which to  
send the document.  
NOTE: The Another No. prompt does not appear if you have added  
numbers for another broadcast or delay fax job. You must wait  
until the job is completed.  
7
To enter more fax numbers, press  
repeat steps 5 and 6. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
1
to select “Yes” and  
Note that you cannot use group dial numbers for another  
fax number.  
8
9
When you finish entering fax numbers, press  
“No at the Another No. prompt.  
2
to select  
The display asks you to enter a name.  
To assign a name to the transmission, enter the name you  
want. For details about entering characters, see page 2.17.  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
10 Press Enter. The display shows the current time and asks  
you to enter the starting time when the fax is to be sent.  
11 Enter the time using the number keypad.  
To select “AM” or “PM” for 12-hour format, press the  
button or any number button.  
or  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the  
document will be sent at that time on the following day.  
12 Press Enter when the starting time displays correctly.  
7.30  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 The document is scanned into memory before transmission.  
The display shows memory capacity and the number of  
pages being stored in memory.  
For a document placed on the document glass, the display  
asks if you want to load another page. Select “1.Yes” to  
add. Otherwise, select “2.No.”  
14 The machine returns to Standby mode. The display reminds  
set.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the delayed transmission, see  
“Canceling a Scheduled Fax” on page 7.34.  
Sending a Priority Fax  
Using the Priority Fax feature, a high priority document can be  
sent ahead of reserved operations. The document is scanned  
into memory and transmitted when the current operation is  
finished. In addition, priority transmission will interrupt a  
broadcast operation between stations (i.e., when the  
transmission to station A ends, before transmission to station B  
begins) or between redial attempts.  
7
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
3
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Priority Fax” on  
the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Enter the number of the receiving machine using the  
number keypad.  
To enter the number, you can use one-touch keypad, speed  
dial, or group dial numbers. For details, see “Automatic  
Dialing” on page 7.19.  
6
7
Press Enter to confirm the number. The display asks you to  
enter a name.  
To assign a name to the transmission, enter the name you  
want. For details about entering characters, see page 2.17.  
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.  
8
Press Enter.  
The document is scanned into memory before transmission.  
The display shows memory capacity and the number of  
pages being stored in memory.  
For a document placed on the document glass, the display  
asks if you want to load another page. Select “1.Yes” to  
add. Otherwise, select “2.No.”  
9
The machine shows the number being dialed and begins  
sending the document.  
7.32  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Documents To a Scheduled  
Fax  
You can add documents to a delayed transmission previously  
reserved in your machine’s memory.  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see  
page 7.9).  
If you need to change the darkness, see page 7.3.  
3
4
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Add Page” on the  
bottom line and press Enter  
.
The display shows the last job reserved in memory.  
7
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the fax job to  
which you want to add documents and press Enter  
.
The machine automatically stores the documents in  
memory, and the display shows memory capacity and the  
number of pages.  
For a document placed on the document glass, the display  
asks if you want to load another page. Select “1.Yes” to  
add. Otherwise, select “2.No.”  
6
After storing, the machine displays the numbers of total  
pages and added pages and then returns to Standby mode.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Canceling a Scheduled Fax  
1
2
Press Menu until “Fax Feature” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Cancel Job” on  
the bottom line and press Enter  
.
The display shows the last job reserved in memory.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the fax job you  
want to cancel, and press Enter  
.
When the display confirms your selection, press  
1
to select  
“Yes.” The selected job is canceled and the machine returns  
to Standby mode.  
To cancel your selection, press  
2
to select “No.”  
7.34  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Additional Features  
Using Secure Receiving Mode  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being  
accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on Secure  
Receiving mode to restrict printing of received faxes when the  
machine is unattended. In Secure Receiving mode, all incoming  
faxes go into memory. When the mode is deactivated, any  
stored faxes are printed.  
To turn Secure Receiving mode on:  
1
2
3
4
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Secure Receive”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “On” on the  
bottom line and press Enter  
.
7
Enter a four-digit passcode you want to use, using the  
number keypad and press Enter  
.
NOTE: You can activate Secure Receiving mode without setting a  
passcode, but cannot protect your faxes.  
5
6
Re-enter the passcode to confirm it and press Enter  
.
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
When a fax is received in Secure Receiving mode, your machine  
stores it in memory and displays “Secure Receive” to let you  
know that there is a fax stored.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To print received documents:  
1
2
3
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 and 2  
on page 7.35.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Print” on the  
bottom line and press Enter  
Enter the four-digit passcode and press Enter  
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.  
.
.
To turn Secure Receiving mode off:  
1
2
3
Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 and 2  
on page 7.35.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Off” on the  
bottom line and press Enter  
.
Enter the four-digit passcode and press Enter  
.
The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes  
stored in memory.  
4
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear.  
Printing Reports  
Your machine can print reports containing useful information.  
The following reports are available:  
Phonebook List  
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the  
machine’s memory as speed dial and group dial numbers.  
You can print this Phonebook list using the Phone Book button:  
see page 7.27.  
Sent Fax Report  
This report shows information on the faxes you have recently  
sent.  
7.36  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Received Fax Report  
This report shows information on the faxes you have recently  
received.  
System Data List  
This list shows the status of the user-selectable options. You  
may print this list to confirm your changes after changing any  
settings.  
Scheduled Job Information  
This list shows the document(s) currently stored for Delayed  
faxes or Toll Save faxes. The list shows the starting time(s) and  
type(s) of operation(s).  
Message Confirmation  
This report shows the fax number, the number of pages, the  
elapsed time of the job, the communication mode, and the  
communication results for a particular fax job.  
You can set up your machine to automatically print a message  
confirmation report after each fax job. See page 7.4.  
Junk Fax Number List  
This list shows up to 10 fax numbers specified as junk fax  
numbers. To add or delete numbers to or from this list, access  
the Junk Fax Setup menu: see page 7.40. When the Junk Fax  
Barrier feature is turned on, incoming faxes from those numbers  
are blocked.  
7
This feature recognize the last 6 digits of the fax number set as  
a remote fax machine’s ID.  
Multi-communication Report  
This report is printed automatically after sending documents  
from more than one location.  
Power Failure Report  
This report is printed out automatically when power is restored  
after a power failure, if any data loss occurs due to the power  
failure.  
NOTE: The lists you have set to print out automatically don’t print  
out when there is no paper loaded or a paper jam has occurred.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Journal  
This list shows information for the Network Scan records  
including IP address, time & date, the number of pages scanned,  
and result. This report is automatically printed when the report  
contains the 50 jobs and the recordes that are printed will be  
deleted.  
Printing a Report  
1
Press Menu until “Report” appears on the top line of the  
display. The first available menu item, “Phone Book,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display the report or list  
you want to print on the bottom line.  
• Phone Book: Phonebook list  
• Sent Report: Sent fax report  
• RCV Report: Received fax report  
• System Data: System data list  
• Scheduled Jobs: Scheduled job information  
• MSG Confirm: Message confirmation  
• Junk Fax List: Junk fax number list  
• Scan Journal: Network Scan sessions list  
3
Press Enter  
.
The selected information prints out.  
Using Advanced Fax Settings  
Your machine has various user-selectable setting options for  
sending or receiving faxes. These options are preset at the  
factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the  
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details  
about printing the list, see above.  
7.38  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Changing Setting Options  
1
Press Menu until “Advanced Fax” appears on the top line of  
the display. The first available menu item, “Send Forward,”  
displays on the bottom line.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the menu item  
you want on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
When the option you want appears on the display, choose a  
status by pressing the scroll button ( or ) or enter a  
value using the number keypad.  
4
5
Press Enter to save the selection.  
You can exit from Setup mode at any time by pressing  
Stop/Clear  
.
Advanced Fax Setting Options  
Option  
Description  
You can set the machine to send a copy of all  
outgoing faxes to a specified destination, in  
addition to the fax numbers you entered.  
Send Forward  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the  
number of the fax machine to which faxes are to  
be sent.  
7
You can set your machine to forward incoming  
faxes to another fax number during a specified  
time period. When a fax arrives at your machine,  
it is stored in memory. Then, the machine dials  
the fax number that you have specified and  
sends the fax.  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
RCV Forward  
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the  
fax number to which faxes are forwarded. Then,  
you can enter the starting time and date, and/or  
the ending time and date. The Print Local  
Copy option allows you to set the machine to  
print the fax on your machine, if fax forwarding  
is completed without any error.  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY) 7.39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Option  
Description  
You can set your machine to store your faxes in  
memory and send them at a specified toll-saving  
time. For details about Toll Save mode, see  
page 2.23.  
Toll Save  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the  
starting time and date, and/or the ending time  
and date for Toll Save mode.  
Using the Junk Fax Barrier feature, the system  
will not accept faxes sent from remote stations  
whose numbers are stored in the memory as  
junk fax numbers. This feature is useful for  
blocking any unwanted faxes.  
Select Off to turn the feature off. Your machine  
accepts all faxes.  
Junk Fax Setup  
Select On to turn the feature on. You can set up  
to 10 fax numbers as junk fax numbers using the  
Setup option. After storing numbers, your  
machine will not accept faxes from the registered  
stations. To delete all junk fax numbers, use the  
All Delete option.  
You can keep your received faxes from being  
accessed by unauthorized people.  
Secure Receive  
Prefix Dial  
For further details about setting this mode, see  
page 7.35.  
You can set a prefix dial number of up to five  
digits. This number dials before any automatic  
dial number is started. It is useful for accessing a  
PABX exchange.  
This option allows the machine to automatically  
print the page number, and the date and time of  
reception at the bottom of each page of a  
received document.  
Stamp RCV  
Name  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on.  
Error Correction Mode helps with poor line quality  
and makes sure any faxes you send are sent  
smoothly to any other ECM-equipped fax  
machine. If the line quality is poor, it takes more  
time to send a fax when you are using ECM.  
ECM Mode  
(Error  
Correction  
Mode)  
Select Off to turn this feature off.  
Select On to turn this feature on.  
7.40  
FAXING (SCX-4720F/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAINTENANCE  
8
This chapter provides information for maintaining your  
machine and the toner cartridge.  
This chapter includes:  
• Clearing the Memory  
• Cleaning Your Machine  
• Maintaining the Toner Cartridge  
• Consumables and Replacement Parts  
• Replacing the ADF Rubber Pad  
• Setting E-mail Notification  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing the Memory  
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s  
memory.  
CAUTION: For SCX-4720F/4720FS users, before clearing the  
memory, make sure that all fax jobs have been completed.  
1
2
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Clear  
Settings” on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “All Settings,displays on  
the bottom line.  
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the item you  
want to clear.  
• All Settings: Clears all of the data stored in the memory  
and resets all of your settings to the factory default.  
• Paper Setting: Restores all of the Paper Setting options to  
the factory default.  
• Copy Setup: Restores all of the Copy Setup options to the  
factory default.  
• Fax Setup: (only for the SCX-4720F/4720FS) Restores all  
of the Fax Setup options to the factory default.  
• Fax Feature: (only for the SCX-4720F/4720FS) Cancels  
all of the scheduled fax jobs in the machine’s memory.  
• Advanced Fax: (only for the SCX-4720F/4720FS)  
Restores all of the Advanced Fax setting options to the  
factory default.  
• Sent Report: (only for the SCX-4720F/4720FS) Clears all  
records of sent faxes.  
• RCV Report: (only for the SCX-4720F/4720FS) Clears all  
records of received faxes.  
• Phone Book: (only for the SCX-4720F/4720FS) Clears the  
one-touch, speed dial, and group dial numbers stored in  
the memory.  
• Scan Journal: (only for the SCX-4720F/4720FS) Clears  
the information on Network Scan sessions in the memory.  
4
Press Enter. The selected memory is cleared and the  
display asks you to continue clearing the next item.  
8.2  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
To clear another item, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
OR  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Cleaning Your Machine  
To maintain print quality, follow the cleaning procedures below  
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print quality  
problems occur.  
CAUTIONS  
:
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials  
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong  
substances can discolor or crack the cabinet.  
• While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to touch  
the transfer roller, located underneath the toner cartridge. Oil  
from your fingers can cause print quality problems.  
Cleaning the Outside  
Clean the cabinet of the machine with a soft lint-free cloth. You  
can dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to  
let any water drip onto or into the machine.  
8
Cleaning the Inside  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can  
accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print  
quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning  
the inside of the machine clears or reduces these problems.  
1
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for  
the machine to cool down.  
MAINTENANCE 8.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2
Open the front door and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly  
pushing it down. Set it on a clean flat surface.  
CAUTIONS  
:
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to  
light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper,  
if necessary.  
• Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the  
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
3
With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled  
toner from the toner cartridge area and the toner cartridge  
cavity.  
CAUTION: Do not touch the black transfer roller inside the  
machine.  
8.4  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the top of the  
cartridge compartment, and gently swab the glass to see if  
dirt turns the white cotton black.  
5
6
Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the door.  
Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.  
Cleaning the Scan Unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible  
copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of  
each day and during the day, as needed.  
1
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with  
water.  
2
3
Open the document cover.  
Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until  
it is clean and dry.  
8
White sheet  
Document cover  
ADF glass  
Document glass  
MAINTENANCE 8.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
5
Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white  
sheet until it is clean and dry.  
Close the document cover.  
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge  
Toner cartridge storage  
To get the most from the toner cartridge, keep the following  
guidelines in mind:  
• Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until  
ready for use.  
• Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty  
does not cover damage caused by using a refilled  
cartridge.  
• Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your  
machine.  
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to  
light for more than a few minutes.  
Saving toner  
To save toner, press the Toner Save button on the control  
panel; see page 2.23. The button backlight turns on. Using this  
feature extends the life of the toner cartridge and reduces your  
cost per page, but it also reduces print quality.  
Expected Cartridge Life  
The life of the toner cartridge depends on the amount of toner  
that print jobs require. When printing text at ISO 19752 5%  
coverage, a new toner cartridge lasts an average of 5,000 or  
3,000 pages. (The original toner cartridge supplied with the  
machine lasts an average of 3,000 pages.) The actual number  
may be different depending on the print density of the page you  
print. If you print a lot of graphics, you may need to change the  
cartridge more often.  
8.6  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Redistributing Toner  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks  
or light printing occurs. The LCD displays the warning message,  
Toner Low.” You can temporarily reestablish print quality by  
redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some  
case, white streaks or light printing still occurs even after you  
have redistributed the toner.  
1
Open the front door.  
2
Pull the toner cartridge out and gently roll the cartridge 5  
or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly inside the  
cartridge.  
8
NOTE: If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth  
and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner  
cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this  
area.  
3
Reinstall the cartridge and close the front door.  
MAINTENANCE 8.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
When the display on the control panel shows the warning  
message, “Toner Empty” or “[Toner Empty] Replace Toner,the  
machine stops printing. For the SCX-4720F/4720FS, incoming  
faxes are saved in memory. At this stage, the toner cartridges  
needs to be replaced.  
NOTE: You can set the machine to ignore the “Toner Empty”  
message and to continue printing.  
1
Open the front door.  
2
Lightly pushing the used cartridge down, pull it out.  
8.8  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Unpack the new toner cartridge and gently roll it  
horizontally 5 or 6 times to distribute the toner evenly  
inside the cartridge.  
Save the box and the plastic bag for shipping.  
NOTE: If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth  
and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner  
cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this  
area.  
4
Hold the toner cartridge by the handle. Slowly insert the  
cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the  
sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the  
machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position  
until it locks into place completely.  
8
Groove  
Tab  
5
Close the front door.  
MAINTENANCE 8.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Notify Toner Option (SCX-4720F/4720FS  
Only)  
If you set the “Notify Toner” menu option to “On,your machine  
automatically sends a fax to your service company or the dealer  
to notify them. The fax number is preset by your dealer when  
you bought your machine.  
Notification cases are like this  
• When the toner cartridges is low.  
• When critical error occured at your machine.  
(Error cases : Engine Error, Invalid Cartridge, CRU Fuse Error,  
Low Heat Error, LSU Error)  
• When notification day and notification pages that are preset  
by your dealer have passed.  
1
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Maintenance” appears  
on the top line of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “Notify Toner ” on  
the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Enter a four-digit password you want to use, using the  
number keypad press Enter  
.
(If you select this menu, for the first time after purchasing  
or after clearing all memory, Re-enter the password to  
confirm it and press Enter.  
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) to change the setting.  
Select “On” to enable this feature. Selecting “Off” disables  
this feature.  
5
6
Press Enter to save the selection.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
8.10  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Drum  
If there are streaks or spots on your print, the OPC drum of the  
toner cartridge may require cleaning.  
1
2
Before starting the cleaning procedure, make sure that  
paper is loaded in the machine.  
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
The first available menu item, “Clean Drum,displays on  
the bottom line.  
3
4
5
Press Enter.  
The first available menu item, “Yes” displays on the bottom  
line.  
Press Enter  
.
The machine prints out a cleaning page. Toner particles on  
the drum surface are affixed to the paper.  
If the problem remains, repeat steps 1 through 4.  
You can set your machine to clean the OPC drum automatically  
every 500 print pages. You should use this feature if you use  
inferior quality paper, because such paper may lower print  
quality.  
1
2
3
Press Menu on the control panel until “Maintenance”  
appears on the top line of the display.  
8
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Auto Cleaning”  
appears on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “On” appears on the  
display.  
NOTE: For users in Asian countries, this feature is preset to "On."  
4
Press Enter.  
The machine will print out an OPC cleaning page every 500  
print pages.  
MAINTENANCE 8.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ignoring the Toner Empty Message  
When the toner cartridge is nearly empty, the machine shows  
the “Toner Empty” or “[Toner Empty] Replace Toner” message  
and stops printing. In this case, the SCX-4720F/4720FS saves  
incoming faxes in memory.  
You can set the machine to ignore the “Toner Empty” message  
when it displays and to continue printing, even though print  
quality is not optimal.  
NOTE: This feature does not work for the “[Toner Empty] Replace  
Toner” message.  
1
2
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Ignore Toner” appears  
on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
3
Press the Scroll button ( or ) to select “On” or “Off.  
Select “On” to ignore the Toner Empty message.  
Select “Off” to stop printing when the message appears.  
This is the default setting.  
4
Press Enter to save the selection.  
8.12  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Consumables and Replacement  
Parts  
From time to time, you needs to replace the toner cartridge,  
roller, and fuser unit to maintain top performance and to avoid  
print quality problems and paper feed problems resulting from  
worn parts.  
The following items should be replaced after you have printed  
the specified number of pages:  
Items  
ADF rubber pad  
Yield (Average)  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
Approx. 60,000 pages  
Approx. 80,000 pages  
Transfer roller  
Fuser unit  
To purchase consumables and replacement parts, contact your  
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine.  
We strongly recommend that these items be installed by a  
trained service professional, except for the toner cartridge (see  
page 8.8) and the ADF rubber pad (see page 8.14).  
8
MAINTENANCE 8.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Replacing the ADF Rubber Pad  
You can purchase an ADF rubber pad from your Samsung dealer  
or the retailer where you bought your machine.  
1
Open the ADF cover.  
2
Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller  
toward the ADF( ) and remove the roller from the  
1
slot( ).  
2
8.14  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Remove the ADF rubber pad from the ADF, as shown.  
4
5
Insert a new ADF rubber pad into place.  
Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push  
the right end of the ADF roller into the right slot ( ).  
1
Rotate the bushing on the right end of the roller toward the  
document input tray ( ).  
2
8
6
Close the ADF cover.  
MAINTENANCE 8.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting E-mail Notification  
This feature allows you to know your machine’s status through  
your e-mail. To set E-mail Notification, you need to enter some  
information in the SyncThru Web Service.  
In the Web Browser address bar, enter your machine’s IP  
address you assigned. Then the SyncThru Web Service opens. It  
is consist of the Information, Machine Setup, Network Settings,  
Maintenance and support tabs.  
Setting the Machine Setup tab  
Select the Machine Setup tab and then configure the E-mail  
Notification option.  
You may see the following window.  
In the Server Information section  
In this section, you can enter your machine’s network  
information.  
IP Address or Host Name: select IP Address or Host Name.  
If you select host name, you need to enter your DNS setting  
in the TCP/IP of Network Settings tab.  
SMTP Server and Port: enter your SMTP Server Host name  
or SMTP Server IP address and port that will be used to  
/
/
/
connect to the SMTP Server. Port is from 1 to 65535. The  
Default Value is 25.  
8.16  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NOTES  
:
• You can not select a web mail server with no SMTP support as a  
SMTP server.  
• Do not chane port number unless you have no problem relating  
to firewall.  
SMTP Requires Authentication: check if the SMTP server  
need to be authenticated.  
SMTP Server Login: enter your login name.  
SMTP Server Password: enter your login password.  
SMTP Server Connection Timeout: enter the timeout  
value. Within the timeout value, you have to access the SMTP  
server. You can enter from 30 to 120 seconds. The default  
value is 30 seconds and if there is no problem to access the  
SMTP server within 30 seconds, do not change the default  
value.  
Reply Address: enter the e-mail address you want to  
receive a reply mail.  
NOTE: If you want to receive the reply to other mail account,  
please type it. If blank, this will not be used.  
In the Recipient list & Conditions section  
In this section, you can enter the receivers’ e-mail addresses  
who will get the E-mail Notification information and decide which  
information will be sent.  
SysAdmin E-mail Address: enter the system  
administrator’s e-mail address.  
Key Users E-mail Address: enter the most important  
manager’s e-mail address.  
8
Service E-mail Address: enter the service administrator’s  
e-mail address.  
Consumable Shortage Warning: select who will receive  
the consumable shortage warning mail.  
Consumable Status Report: select who will receive the  
consumable status report mail.  
Alert System Error: select who will receive the alert system  
error mail.  
MAINTENANCE 8.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the Select Notification section  
In this section, you can select various settings.  
Consumable Shortage Warning: select Off not to send the  
consumable shortage warning mail or After the remaining  
level is approximately 20% to send e-mail when the  
remaining items are almost at the end of their life.  
NOTE: Remaining level will follow in system and there is a  
possibility this percentage being different.  
Consumable Status Report: select Off not to send the  
consumable status report mail or Every 1000 pages to send  
e-mail after printing 1000 pages. The mail contains  
information about firmware version, toner count and  
currently installed option.  
Alert System Error: check the option you want to know  
when error occurs.  
8.18  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Contact Information tab  
Select the Support tab to know and enter some information in  
the Contact Information section.  
Name: enter the e-mail sender’s name like your office name.  
Phone Number: enter a phone number recorded in the E-  
mail Notification mail.  
Location: enter a position information recorded in the E-mail  
Notification mail.  
Address: enter the sender’s e-mail address.  
NOTE: It is possible that Firewall in the network will prevent  
e-mail transmission.  
8
MAINTENANCE 8.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
8.20  
MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
9
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do  
if you encounter an error.  
This chapter includes:  
• Clearing Document Jams  
• Clearing Paper Jams  
• Clearing LCD Error Messages  
• Solving Other Problems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Document Jams  
When a document jams while passing through the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder), “Document Jam” appears on the  
display.  
Input Misfeed  
1
2
Remove any remaining page(s) from the ADF.  
Open the ADF cover.  
3
Rotate the bushing on the right end of the ADF roller  
toward the ADF ( ) and remove the roller from the slot  
1
(
). Pull the document gently to the left and out of the  
2
ADF.  
9.2  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Align the left end of the ADF roller with the slot and push  
the right end of the ADF roller into the right slot ( ).  
1
Rotate the bushing on the right end of the roller toward the  
document input tray ( ).  
2
5
Close the ADF cover. Then load the removed page(s), if  
any, back into the ADF.  
NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the document glass for  
thick, thin, or mixed paper-type documents.  
Exit Misfeed  
1
2
Remove any remaining page(s) from the ADF.  
Open the document cover and turn the release knob to  
remove the misfed documents from the document output  
tray.  
9
3
Close the document cover. Then load the removed page(s),  
if any, back into the ADF.  
9.3  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roller Misfeed  
1
2
3
Remove any remaining page(s) from the ADF.  
Open the document cover.  
Turn the release knob so that you can easily seize the  
misfed page, and remove the page from the roller or the  
feed area by carefully pulling it to the right using both  
hands.  
4
Close the document cover. Then load the removed page(s),  
if any, back into the ADF.  
9.4  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Paper Jams  
When a paper jam occurs, “Paper Jam” appears on the display.  
Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
Message  
Paper Jam 0  
Location of Jam  
Go to  
In the paper tray  
(Tray 1 or Tray 2)  
below and  
page 9.6  
Open/Close Door  
Paper Jam 1  
In the paper exit area  
page 9.9  
Open/Close Door  
Paper Jam 2  
Check Inside  
In the fuser area or  
around the toner  
cartridge.  
page 9.7  
MP Tray Jam  
In the Multipurpose tray  
page 9.10  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull out the jammed paper gently  
and slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to  
clear the jam.  
In Tray 1  
1
Open and close the front door. The jammed paper  
automatically exits the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, continue to step 2.  
Pull Tray 1 open.  
2
9
9.5  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
If there is any resistance and the paper does not move  
when you pull, or if you cannot see the paper in this area,  
check the fuser area around the toner cartridge. See  
page 9.7.  
4
5
Insert the paper tray into the machine until it snaps into  
place.  
Open and close the front door to resume printing.  
In Optional Tray 2  
1
2
Pull the optional Tray 2 open.  
Remove the jammed paper from the machine.  
If there is any resistance and the paper does not move  
when you pull, or if you cannot see the paper in this area,  
go to step 3.  
3
Pull the standard Tray 1 open.  
9.6  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Pull the paper straight up and out.  
5
6
Insert Tray 1 into the machine until it snaps into place.  
Open and close the front door to resume printing.  
In the Fuser Area or Around the Toner  
Cartridge  
NOTE: The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from  
the machine.  
1
Open the front door and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly  
pushing it down.  
9
9.7  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
3
Replace the toner cartridge and close the front door.  
Printing automatically resumes.  
9.8  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the Paper Exit Area  
1
Open and close the front door. The jammed paper  
automatically exits the machine.  
If the paper does not exit, continue to step 2.  
2
Gently pull the paper out of the front output tray. Skip to  
step 6.  
3
If there is any resistance and the paper does not move  
when you pull, or if you cannot see the paper in the front  
output tray, open the rear door.  
9
9.9  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
5
6
Close the rear door.  
Open and close the front door to resume printing.  
In the Multipurpose Tray  
“MP Tray Jam” appears on the display when you try to print  
using the Multipurpose tray and the machine does not detect  
paper. This may be a lack of paper or improper paper loading.  
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the  
machine.  
To resume printing, open and close the front door.  
9.10  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
By selecting the correct paper types, most paper jams can be  
avoided. When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined in  
“Clearing Paper Jams” on page 9.5.  
• Follow the procedures in “Loading Paper” on page 2.7. Ensure  
that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly.  
• Do not overload the paper tray. Ensure that the paper is  
below the paper capacity mark on the inside wall of the paper  
tray.  
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is  
printing.  
• Flex, fan, and straighten the paper before loading.  
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
• Do not mix paper types in the paper tray.  
• Use only recommended print materials. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
• Ensure that the recommended print side of print materials is  
facing down in the paper tray and facing up in the  
Multipurpose tray.  
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5-sized  
paper:  
- Load the paper into the tray, as shown below.  
- Set the page orientation to Landscape in the printer  
properties window. See page 4.5.  
9
9.11  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing LCD Error Messages  
Display  
Cancel ?  
1:Yes 2:No  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Your machine’s memory  
has become full while  
trying to store a  
To cancel the fax job, press the  
button to accept “Yes.”  
If you want to send there pages  
that have been successfully  
1
document into memory.  
stored, press the  
2
button to  
accept “No.” You should send the  
remaining pages later, when  
memory is available.  
[Comm. Error]  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
The machine has a  
communication problem.  
Ask the sender to try again.  
Delayed  
The delayed fax jobs  
queue is full.  
Cancel unnecessary delayed fax  
job.  
Function Full  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
Document Jam  
The loaded document  
has jammed in the ADF  
(Automatic Document  
Feeder).  
Clear the document jam. See  
page 9.2.  
[Door Open]  
Enter Again  
The front door is not  
securely latched.  
Close the door until it locks into  
place.  
You entered an  
unavailable item.  
Enter the correct item again.  
Low Heat Error  
Open Heat Error  
[Over Heat]  
There is a problem in the  
fuser unit.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it  
back in. If the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Function  
Impossible  
You have tried to use a  
combination of machine  
functions that can not be  
used at the same time.  
Reduce the number of selected  
functions or use only one function  
at a time.  
Group Not  
Available  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
You have tried to select a  
group location number  
where only a single  
location number can be  
used, such as when  
Use a speed dial number or dial a  
number manually using the  
number keypad.  
adding locations for a  
broadcast operation.  
9.12  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Display  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
[Incompatible]  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
The remote machine did  
not have the requested  
feature, such as a  
Reconfirm the remote machine’s  
features.  
delayed transmission.  
This message also occurs  
if the remote machine  
does not have enough  
memory space to  
complete the operation  
you are attempting.  
[Jam 1] or [No  
Cartridge]  
Paper has jammed in the  
fuser area.  
Or, the toner cartridge is  
not installed.  
Clear the jam. See page 9.7.  
Or, install the toner cartridge. See  
page 2.5.  
[Line Busy]  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
The receiving party did  
not answer or the line is  
already engaged.  
Try again after a few minutes.  
[Line Error]  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
Your machine cannot  
connect with the remote  
machine or has lost  
contact because of a  
problem with the phone  
line.  
Try again. If the problem persists,  
wait an hour or so for the line to  
clear and try again.  
Or, turn the ECM mode on. See  
page 7.40.  
Load Document  
[LSU Error]  
You have attempted to  
set up a copy or fax  
operation with no  
document loaded into the  
ADF.  
Load a document into the ADF and  
try again.  
A problem has occurred  
in the LSU (Laser  
Scanning Unit).  
Unplug the power cord and plug it  
back in. If the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Memory Full  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
The memory is full.  
Delete unnecessary documents  
and retransmit after more  
memory becomes available.  
Alternatively, split the  
9
transmission into more than one  
operation.  
MP Tray Jam  
A paper jam has  
occurred in the  
Multipurpose tray.  
Or, the machine detects  
improper feeding from  
the Multipurpose tray.  
Clear the jam. See page 9.10.  
Or, load paper in the Multipurpose  
tray correctly. See page 3.6.  
9.13  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display  
[No Answer]  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
The receiving fax  
machine has not  
answered after several  
redial attempts.  
Try again. Make sure that the  
receiving machine is operational.  
No. Not  
Assigned  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
The one-touch or speed  
dial location you tried to  
use has no number  
assigned to it.  
Dial the number manually using  
the number keypad or assign the  
number. For storing a number, see  
“Automatic Dialing” on page 7.19.  
Invalid Cartridge  
Or  
You have used an  
unauthorized cartridge.  
You must use a Samsung  
approved cartridge.  
No Cartridge  
No. Not  
Available  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
You have tried to delete  
the number for a delayed  
fax job.  
Verify the number to be deleted  
Or, delete the number after the  
delayed fax job has been sent.  
[No Paper]  
Add Paper  
The paper in the paper  
tray has run out.  
Load paper in the paper tray. See  
page 2.7.  
Operation  
You are doing the Add/  
Cancel operation, but  
there are no jobs  
waiting.  
Check the display to see if there  
are any scheduled jobs. The  
display should indicate them in  
Standby mode; for example,  
Delay Fax.  
Not Assigned  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
Paper Jam 0  
Open/Close Door  
Paper has jammed in the  
feeding area of the paper  
tray.  
Clear the jam. See page 9.5 and  
page 9.6.  
Paper Jam 1  
Open/Close Door  
Paper has jammed in the  
fuser area.  
Clear the jam. See page 9.7.  
Clear the jam. See page 9.9.  
Paper Jam 2  
Check Inside  
Paper has jammed in the  
paper exit area.  
[Power Failure]  
Power has turned off  
then on and the  
machine’s memory has  
not been saved.  
The job which you were trying to  
do before the power failure must  
be completely re-done.  
Priority Fax  
Function Full  
The priority fax jobs  
queue is full.  
Cancel unnecessary priority fax  
jobs.  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
[Retry Redial?]  
(only for the SCX-  
4720F/4720FS)  
The machine is waiting  
for a specified time  
interval to redial a  
You can press Enter to  
immediately redial, or Stop/  
Clear to cancel the redial  
operation.  
previously busy station.  
9.14  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Scanner Locked  
The scanner module is  
locked  
Unlock the scanner (see page 2.3)  
and press Stop/Clear  
.
[Stop Pressed]  
The Stop/Clear button  
has been pressed during  
a copy or fax operation.  
Try again.  
Toner Empty  
Or  
[Toner Empty]  
Replace Toner  
The toner cartridge has  
run out. The machine  
stops printing.  
Replace the toner cartridge with a  
new one. See page 8.8.  
[Toner Low]  
The toner is almost  
empty.  
Take out the toner cartridge and  
gently shake it. By doing this, you  
can temporarily reestablish  
printing operations.  
9
9.15  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving Other Problems  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended  
solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the  
problem persists, please call for service.  
Paper Feeding Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Clear the paper jam. See page 9.5.  
Paper is jammed  
during printing.  
Paper sticks together.  
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the paper tray.  
The paper tray can hold up to 250 sheets of paper,  
depending on the thickness of your paper.  
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. See  
“Paper Specifications” on page F.6.  
• Remove paper from the paper tray and flex or fan the  
paper.  
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.  
Multiple sheets of  
paper do not feed.  
• Different types of paper may be stacked in the paper tray.  
Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.  
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam, clear the paper  
jam. See page 9.5.  
Paper does not feed  
into the machine.  
• Remove any obstructions inside the machine.  
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from  
the tray and reload it correctly.  
• There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess  
paper from the tray.  
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the  
specifications required by the machine. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
• There is too much paper in the paper tray. Remove excess  
paper from the tray. If you are printing on special  
materials, use the Multipurpose tray.  
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper  
that meets the specifications required by the machine. See  
“Paper Specifications” on page F.6.  
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front  
door and remove the debris.  
Transparencies stick  
together in the paper  
exit.  
Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser  
printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the  
machine.  
9.16  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Envelopes skew or fail  
to feed correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the  
envelopes.  
Printing Problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine  
does not print.  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord connections. Check  
the power switch and the power source.  
The machine is not  
selected as the default  
printer.  
Select Samsung SCX-4x20 Series  
PCL 6 as your default printer in your  
Windows.  
Check the machine for  
the following:  
After locating the problem, clear it.  
• Close the door.  
• The front door is not  
closed.  
• Paper is jammed.  
• No paper is loaded.  
• Clear the paper jam. See page 9.5.  
• Load paper. See page 2.7.  
• Install the toner cartridge. See  
page 2.5.  
• The toner cartridge  
is not installed.  
If a printer system error occurs, contact  
your service representative.  
The connection cable  
between the computer  
and the machine is not  
connected properly.  
Disconnect the printer cable and  
reconnect it.  
The connection cable  
between the computer  
and the machine is  
defective.  
If possible, attach the cable to another  
computer that is working properly and  
print a job. You can also try using a  
different printer cable.  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer setting to  
make sure that the print job is sent to the  
correct port, for example, LPT1. If the  
computer has more than one port, make  
sure that the machine is attached to the  
correct one.  
9
The machine may be  
configured incorrectly.  
Check the printer properties to ensure  
that all of the print settings are correct.  
The printer driver may  
be incorrectly  
Repair the printer software. See  
page 2.34.  
installed.  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message on the control  
panel to see if the machine is indicating a  
system error.  
9.17  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine  
selects print  
materials from  
the wrong  
The paper source  
selection in the printer  
properties may be  
incorrect.  
For many software applications, the paper  
source selection is found under the Paper  
tab within the printer properties. Select  
the correct paper source. See page 4.6.  
paper source.  
A print job is  
extremely slow. complex.  
The job may be very  
Reduce the complexity of the page or try  
adjusting the print quality settings.  
The maximum print speed of your  
machine is 22 PPM for Letter-sized paper  
and 20 PPM for A4-sized paper.  
If you are using  
From the Start menu, choose Settings  
and Printers. Right-click the Samsung  
SCX-4x20 Series PCL 6 machine icon,  
choose Properties, click the Details tab,  
and then choose the Spool Settings  
button. Select the desired spool setting.  
Windows 9x/Me, the  
Spooling Setting may  
be set incorrectly.  
Half the page is  
blank.  
The page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
Change the page orientation in your  
application. See page 4.5.  
The paper size and the  
paper size settings do  
not match.  
Ensure that the paper size in the printer  
driver settings matches the paper in the  
tray.  
Or, ensure that the paper size in the  
printer driver settings matches the paper  
selection in the software application  
settings you use.  
The machine  
prints, but the  
text is wrong,  
garbled, or  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable and  
reconnect. Try a print job that you have  
already printed successfully. If possible,  
attach the cable and the machine to  
another computer and try a print job that  
you know works. Finally, try a new printer  
cable.  
incomplete.  
The wrong printer  
driver was selected.  
Check the application’s printer selection  
menu to ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
The software  
application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from another  
application.  
The operating system  
is malfunctioning.  
Exit Windows and reboot the computer.  
Turn the machine off and then back on  
again.  
9.18  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
Pages print, but  
are blank.  
The toner cartridge is  
defective or out of  
toner.  
Redistribute the toner, if necessary. See  
page 8.7.  
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that it does not  
contain blank pages.  
Some parts, such as  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
Contact a service representative.  
defective.  
Theillustrations  
printincorrectly  
in Adobe  
The setting in the  
software application is  
wrong.  
Select Download as Bit Image in the  
TrueType Options window of the  
Graphic properties and print the  
document again.  
Illustrator.  
Printing Quality Problems  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, you may  
notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page:  
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily  
extend the toner cartridge life. See “Redistributing Toner”  
on page 8.7. If this does not improve the print quality,  
install a new toner cartridge.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example,  
the paper is too moist or too rough. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too  
low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print  
resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See page 4.8  
and page 2.23, respectively.  
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate  
that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. See “Cleaning the  
Drum” on page 8.11.  
9
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be  
dirty. Clean the LSU (see page 8.5).  
9.19  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Condition  
Toner specs  
Suggested solutions  
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the  
paper is too moist or too rough. See “Paper Specifications”  
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your  
machine. See “Cleaning the Inside” on page 8.3.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• The paper path may need cleaning. See “Cleaning the  
Drum” on page 8.11.  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the  
page:  
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the  
job.  
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper  
has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of  
paper. See “Paper Specifications” on page F.6.  
cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or  
brand of paper.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. See “Vertical  
repetitive defects” on page 9.21.  
• If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service  
representative.  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The drum inside the toner cartridge has probably been  
scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new  
one. See “Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 8.8.  
A
A
A
aaBbCc  
aaBbCc  
aaBbCc  
aaBbCc  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be  
A
A
aaBbCc  
Gray background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• Change to a lighter weight paper. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
• Check the machine’s environment: very dry (low humidity)  
or high humidity (higher than 80% RH) conditions can  
increase the amount of background shading.  
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 8.8.  
9.20  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Condition  
Toner smear  
• Clean the inside of the machine. See “Cleaning the Inside”  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 8.8.  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at  
even intervals:  
occurs on the page, print a cleaning sheet several times to  
clean the cartridge; see “Cleaning the Drum” on  
page 8.11. After the printout, if you still have the same  
problems, remove the toner cartridge and install a new  
one. See “Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 8.8.  
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the  
defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will  
likely correct itself after a few more pages.  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service  
representative.  
• If you use inferior quality paper;see “Cleaning the Drum”  
on page 8.11.  
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly  
distributed on the printed page.  
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different  
batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until  
necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
A
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the  
printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams  
can cause problems.  
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a  
software application or the printer properties.  
9
Misformed  
characters  
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow  
images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try a different  
paper. See “Paper Specifications” on page F.6.  
• If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy  
effect, the scanner unit may need service. For service,  
contact a service representative.  
9.21  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Condition  
Page skew  
Suggested solutions  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
• Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly  
and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the  
paper stack.  
Curl or wave  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature  
and humidity can cause paper curl. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
Wrinkles or  
creases  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. See  
“Cleaning the Inside” on page 8.3.  
Black pages  
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove  
the cartridge and reinsert it.  
• The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 8.8.  
• The machine may require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
9.22  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Condition  
Loose toner  
• Clean the inside of the machine. See “Cleaning the Inside”  
• Check the paper type and quality. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See  
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” on page 8.8.  
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.  
Contact a service representative.  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters  
that should be solid black:  
• If you are using transparencies, try another type of  
transparency. Because of the composition of  
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper.  
Remove the paper and turn it around.  
• The paper may not meet paper specifications. See “Paper  
Specifications” on page F.6.  
A
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
AaBbCc  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:  
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove  
the cartridge and reinsert it.  
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner  
cartridge and install a new one. See “Replacing the Toner  
Cartridge” on page 8.8.  
• If the problem persists, the machine may require repair.  
Contact a service representative.  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the  
machine:  
Turn over the stack of paper in the input tray. Also try  
rotating the paper 180° in the input tray.  
Try printing to the rear output slot.  
9
9.23  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light or too  
dark.  
Use the Darkness button to darken or lighten the  
background of the copies.  
Smears, lines, marks, or  
spots appears on copies.  
• If defects are on the original, press the Darkness  
button to lighten the background of your copies.  
• If no defects are on the original, clean the scan unit.  
See page 8.5.  
Copy image is skewed.  
• Ensure that the original is face down on the  
document glass or face up in the ADF (Automatic  
Document Feeder).  
• Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.  
Blank copies print out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the document  
glass or face up in the ADF.  
Image rubs off the copy  
easily.  
• Replace the paper in the paper tray with paper from  
a new package.  
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the  
machine for extended periods of time.  
Frequent copy paper jams  
occur.  
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the paper  
tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh  
supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if necessary.  
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight.  
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond paper is recommended.  
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper  
remaining in the machine after a paper jam has  
been cleared.  
Toner cartridge produces  
fewer copies than expected  
before running out of toner.  
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy  
lines. For example, your originals may be forms,  
newsletters, books, or other documents that use  
more toner.  
• The machine may be turned on and off frequently.  
• The document cover may be left open while copies  
are being made.  
9.24  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning Problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The scanner does not work.  
• Make sure that you place the document to be  
scanned face down on the document glass, or  
face up in the Automatic Document Feeder.  
• There may not be enough available memory to  
hold the document you want to scan. Try the  
Prescan function to see if that works. Try  
lowering the scan resolution rate.  
• Check that the USB or parallel cable is  
connected properly.  
• Make sure that the USB or parallel cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known good  
cable. If necessary, replace the cable.  
• If you are using a parallel cable, ensure that it is  
compliant with IEEE 1284 standards.  
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly.  
Check scan setting in the SmarThru  
Configuration or the application you want to use  
to make certain that the scanner job is being  
sent to the correct port, for example, LPT1.  
The unit scans very slowly.  
• Check if the machine is printing received data.  
If so, scan the document after the received data  
has been printed.  
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
• Communication speed slows in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory  
required to analyze and reproduce the scanned  
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer  
mode through BIOS setting. It will help to  
increase the speed. For details about how to set  
BIOS, refer to your computer User’s Guide.  
9
9.25  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Message appears on your  
computer screen:  
• “Device can't be set to the H/W  
mode you want.”  
• “Port is being used by another  
program.”  
• “Port is Disabled.  
• “Scanner is busy receiving or  
printing data. When the current  
job is completed, try again.”  
• “Invalid handle.”  
• “Scanning has failed.”  
• There may be a copying or printing job in  
progress. When that job is complete, try your  
job again.  
• The Selected port is currently being used.  
Restart your computer and try again.  
• The printer cable may be improperly connected  
or the power may be off. You must use a parallel  
cable that supports IEEE-1284 bi-directional  
communications.  
• The scanner driver is not installed or the  
operating environment is not set up properly.  
• Ensure that the machine is properly connected  
and the power is on, Then restart your  
computer.  
• The USB cable may be improperly connected or  
the power may be off.  
• Do not use parallel and USB cables at the same  
time.  
Fax Problems  
(SCX-4720F/4720FS Only)  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display and the buttons  
are not working.  
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
• Ensure that there is power to the electrical outlet.  
No dial tone sounds.  
• Check that the phone line is connected properly.  
• Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by  
plugging in another phone.  
The numbers stored in  
memory do not dial  
correctly.  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory  
correctly. Print a Phonebook list, referring to page 7.27.  
The document does not  
feed into the machine.  
• Make sure that the document is not wrinkled and you  
are putting it in correctly. Check that the document is  
the right size, not too thick or thin.  
• Make sure that the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)  
cover is firmly closed.  
Faxes are not received  
automatically.  
• Fax mode should be selected.  
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
• Check to see if the display shows “Memory Full.”  
9.26  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not  
send.  
• Make sure that the document is loaded in the ADF or  
on the document glass.  
• “TX” should show up on the display.  
• Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it  
can receive your fax.  
The incoming fax has  
blank spaces or is of poor-  
quality.  
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
• Check your machine by making a copy.  
• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner  
cartridge, referring to page 8.8.  
Some of the words on an  
incoming fax are  
stretched.  
The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary  
document jam.  
There are lines on the  
documents you send.  
Check your scanning glass for marks and clean it. See  
page 8.5.  
The machine dials a  
number, but a connection  
with the other fax  
machine fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper,  
or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other  
machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the  
problem.  
Documents are not stored  
in memory.  
There may not be enough memory to store the  
document. If the display shows a “Memory Full”  
message, delete from memory any documents you no  
longer need and then try again to store the document.  
Blank areas appear at the  
bottom of each page or on  
other pages, with a small  
strip of text at the top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the  
user option setting. For details about paper settings, see  
page 2.20.  
9
9.27  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Common Linux Problems  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
The machine doesn’t  
print  
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open  
MFP configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers  
configuration window to look at the list of available  
printers. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the  
list. If not, please, invoke Add new printer wizard to set up  
your device.  
• Check if the printer is started. Open Printers configuration  
and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the  
description in the Selected printer pane. If its status  
contains “(stopped)” string, please, press the Start  
button. After that normal operation of the printer should be  
restored. The "stopped" status might be activated when  
some problems in printing occurred. For instance, this  
could be an attempt to print document when MFP port is  
claimed by a scanning application.  
• Check if the MFP port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same  
I/O interface (MFP port), the situation of simultaneous  
access of different “consumer” application to the same MFP  
port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of  
them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device.  
The other “consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. You should open MFP ports configuration and  
select the port assigned to your printer. In the Selected  
port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other  
application. If this is the case, you should wait for  
completion of the current job or should press Release port  
button, if you are sure that the present owner is not  
functioning properly.  
Check if your application has special print option such as  
“-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line  
parameter then remove it to print properly. For Gimp  
front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit  
command line parameter in the command item.  
The machine does not  
appear on the scanners  
list  
• Check if your machine is attached to your computer. Make  
sure that it is connected properly via the USB port and is  
turned on.  
• Check if the scanner driver for you machine is installed in  
your system. Open MFP Configurator, switch to Scanners  
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver  
with a name corresponding to your machine's name is  
listed in the window.  
9.28  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
The machine does not  
appear on the scanners  
list (continued)  
• Check if the MFP port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same  
I/O interface (MFP port), the situation of simultaneous  
access of different “consumer” application to the same MFP  
port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of  
them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device.  
The other “consumer” will encounter “device busy”  
response. This can usually happen while starting scan  
procedure, and appropriate message box displays.  
To identify the source of the problem, you should open MFP  
ports configuration and select the port assigned to your  
scanner. MFP port's symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0  
designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /dev/mfp4, so  
scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so  
forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if  
the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the  
case, you should wait for completion of the current job or  
should press Release port button, if you are sure that the  
present port's owner is not functioning properly.  
The machine doesn’t  
scan  
• Check if a document is loaded into the machine.  
• Check if your machine is connected to the computer. Make  
sure if it is connected properly if I/O error is reported while  
scanning.  
• Check if MFP port is not busy. Since functional components  
of MFP (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface  
(MFP port), the situation of simultaneous access of  
different “consumer” application to the same MFP port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a  
time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other  
“consumer” will encounter “device busy” response. This  
can usually happen while starting scan procedure, and  
appropriate message box will be displayed.  
To identify the source of the problem, you should open MFP  
ports configuration and select the port assigned to your  
scanner. MFP port’s symbol /dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0  
designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /dev/mfp4, so  
scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so  
forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can see if  
the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the  
case, you should wait for completion of the current job or  
should press Release port button, if you are sure that the  
9
present port’s owner is not functioning properly  
.
9.29  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
I can’t print when I  
installed both Linux  
Print Package (LPP) and  
MFP driver on the same  
machine  
• Since both Linux Printer Package and MFP driver make a  
symbolic link to “lpr” printing command, which is  
commonly used on Unix clones, it is not recommended to  
use both package on the same machine.  
• If you still want to use both packages simultaneously,  
please install the LPP first.  
simultaneously.  
• If you want to uninstall only one of them, please uninstall  
both packages and install that one you want to use again.  
• If you don’t want to uninstall MFP driver and install it  
again, you may make the necessary symbolic link yourself.  
Please, log in as root user and invoke the following  
command:  
ln -sf /usr/local/bin/samsung/slpr /usr/bin/lpr  
Can’t scan via Gimp  
Front-end.  
• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane:Device dialog..” on the  
“Acquire” menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for  
Gimp on the your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in  
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home  
page. For the detail information, refer to the Help for Linux  
distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application.  
If you wish to use other kind of scan application, refer to the  
Help for application.  
I encounter error  
“Cannot open MFP port  
device file” when  
Please avoid changing print job parameters (via SLPR utility,  
for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions  
of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options  
are changed and then try to restart the job from the  
printing a document.  
beginning. Since Linux MFP driver locks MFP port while  
printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port  
locked and therefore unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If  
this situation occurred, please, try to release the MFP port.  
9.30  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting PostScript Errors (SCX-4720F/4720FS only)  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer  
languages are being used.  
NOTE: To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript errors occur,  
open the Print Options window and click the desired selection next to the PostScript  
errors section.  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Solution  
PostScript file can  
not be printed.  
The PostScript driver  
may not be installed  
correctly.  
• Install the PostScript driver,  
referring to page B.2.  
• Print a configuration page and verify  
that the PS version is available for  
printing.  
• If the problem persists, contact a  
service representative.  
“This job contains  
binary data...”  
message appears.  
The pure binary data  
option is not supported  
by the PostScript  
driver.  
Open the Properties of the PostScript  
driver, click on PostScript, and click  
on Advanced. The pure binary data  
option is not supported. Choose  
another option.  
A PostScript error  
page prints.  
Print job may not be  
PostScript.  
Make sure that the print job is a  
PostScript job. Check to see whether  
the software application expected a  
setup or PostScript header file to be  
sent to the machine.  
The optional Tray 2  
is not selected in  
the driver.  
The printer driver has  
not been configured to  
recognize the optional  
Tray 2.  
Open the PostScript driver properties  
and select the Device Settings tab  
and set the Tray 2 option of the  
Installable Options section to  
Installed  
.
When print a  
document in  
Macintosh with  
Acrobat Reader 6.0  
or higher, colors  
print incorrectly.  
The resolution setting  
in the printer driver  
may not be matched  
with that in Acrobat  
Reader.  
Make sure that the resolution setting  
in your printer driver matches that in  
Acrobat Reader.  
9
9.31  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Common Macintosh Problems (SCX-4720F/4720FS only)  
Problems in the Chooser  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
Software is not installed correctly.  
• The LaserWriter driver should be present as part of the  
Macintosh OS. Make sure that the LaserWriter driver is in  
the Extensions folder within the Systems folder. If not,  
install the LaserWriter driver component from the  
Macintosh OS CD.  
The printer driver  
icon does not appear  
in Chooser.  
• Make sure that you are using a high-quality cable.  
• Make sure that the machine is on the correct network.  
Select Network or AppleTalk Control Panel from  
Control Panels in the Apple menu and then choose the  
correct network.  
The machine name  
does not appear in  
the Select a  
PostScript Printer  
box in the Chooser.  
• Make sure that the cables are connected correctly and the  
machine is turned on.  
• Check if “Ready” appears on the display of the control  
panel. If not, press the Stop/Clear button to switch your  
machine to on-line.  
• Make sure that the correct printer driver has been selected  
in Chooser.  
• If the machine resides on a network with multiple zones,  
make sure that the correct zone is selected in the  
AppleTalk Zones box in Chooser.  
• Make sure that AppleTalk is on; the button next to Active  
is selected in Chooser. You may need to restart the  
computer to activate the change.  
Printing Errors  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
You cannot use the  
computer while the  
machine is printing.  
Background Printing has not been selected.  
• For LaserWriter 8.3, turn Background Printing on in the  
Chooser. Status messages will now be redirected to the  
Print Monitor allowing you to continue working while the  
computer is processing data to be sent to the machine.  
• For LaserWriter 8.4 or higher, turn Background Printing  
on at the Print window.  
9.32  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
USING USB FLASH DRIVE  
10  
This chapter explains how to use a USB flash drive with  
your machine.  
• Managing the USB Flash Drive  
• Printing From the USB Flash Drive  
• Backing Up Data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About USB Flash Drives  
USB flash drives are available with various memory capacities to  
give you enough room to store documents, presentations,  
downloaded music and videos, high resolution photographs, or  
whatever other files you want to take with you.  
Simply insert a USB flash drive into the USB port in the front of  
your machine and your machine will automatically detect it as a  
removable disk drive. Then you can do the following:  
• Scan documents and save them on the USB flash drive.  
• Print the data stored on the USB flash drive.  
• Back up data, such as Phonebook entries (for the SCX-4720F/  
4720FS only) and the system settings of your machine.  
• Restore backup files to the machine’s memory.  
• Delete scanned images.  
• Format the USB flash drive.  
• Check the available memory space.  
• USB 1.1 or 2.0 memory sticks are supported.  
Installing a USB Flash Drive  
There is a USB port in the front of your machine. This port is  
designed for USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 flash drives.  
CAUTIONS  
:
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the machine is in  
operation. This may damage your machine.  
• If your USB flash drive has certain features, such as security  
settings and password settings, your machine may not  
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see the  
User’s Guide for your USB flash drive.  
• You must use only an authorized USB flash driver whose  
connector style is A Plug Type. Unauthorized USB flash drives  
may not work with your machine.  
Use only the metal/shielded USB flash  
driver.  
10.2  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To install a USB flash drive, insert it into the USB port in the front  
of your machine.  
Once you have installed the USB flash drive, you can  
immediately print files stored on it.  
Scanning to USB Flash Drive  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image on the  
USB flash drive. There are two ways of doing this: you can scan  
to the USB flash drive using the default settings, or you can  
manually select your own settings.  
Scanning With Default Settings  
1
Load the document face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
3
Make sure that the USB flash drive is inserted into the USB  
port in the front of the machine. If necessary, insert the  
flash drive. See page 10.2.  
10  
Press Scan-to on the control panel.  
The first available menu item, “USB Memory,appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE 10.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Press Enter. The display shows the available memory  
space for about 2 seconds and the first available menu  
item, “Auto Scan,appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
5
6
Press Enter to start scanning. The scanned image is saved  
on the USB flash drive.  
When a document is loaded on the document glass, the  
display shows “Another Page?” on the top line after the  
page has been scanned into memory. If you have another  
page, remove the scanned page and place the next page on  
the glass. Select “Yes. Repeat as necessary.  
After all of the pages have been scanned, select “No” when  
the display asks “Another Page?.”  
7
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear.  
Scanning With Your Own Settings  
1
Load the document face up into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see page 7.6.  
2
3
Make sure that the USB flash drive is inserted into the USB  
port in the front of the machine. If necessary, insert the  
flash drive. See page 10.2.  
Press Scan-to on the control panel.  
The first available menu item, “USB Memory,appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
4
Press Enter. The display shows the available memory  
space for about 2 seconds and the first available menu  
item, “Auto Scan,appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
5
6
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Manual Scan” appears  
on the bottom line of the display. Press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ) and select the size of the  
image to be scanned. Press Enter  
.
10.4  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Press the scroll button ( or ) and select the file format in  
which the document is to be scanned.  
8
9
Press Enter.  
If you selected “BMP” in step 7, you are asked to select a  
color format, Color, Gray, or Mono, by pressing the scroll  
button ( or ).  
If you selected “PDF” in step 7, you are asked to select a  
color format, Color or Mono, by pressing the scroll button  
( or ). You can save a multiple-page document as a  
single file, the machine displays “Multi Page” and offers you  
the choice of “On” or “Off.If you select “On” you can save  
multiple pages as a single file, but this feature is only  
activated when you load your document into the ADF. The  
ADF can handle documents of up to 50 pages at a time.  
If you selected “TIFF” in step 7, you can save a multiple-  
page document as a single file. After you select “TIFF, the  
machine displays “Multi Page” and offers you the choice of  
“On” or “Off.If you select “On” you can save multiple  
pages as a single file, but this feature is only activated  
when you load your document into the ADF. The ADF can  
handle documents of up to 50 pages at a time.  
10 Press Enter to start scanning. The scanned image is saved  
on the USB flash drive.  
11 When a document is loaded on the document glass, the  
display shows “Another Page?” on the top line after the  
document has been scanned into memory. If you have  
another page, remove the scanned page and load the next  
page on the glass. Select “Yes. Repeat as necessary.  
After all of the pages have been scanned, select “No” when  
the display asks “Another Page?.”  
12 To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear.  
10  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE 10.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing the USB Flash Drive  
Changing the Default Settings  
When you scan a document to the USB flash drive, the default  
scan options, including scan size and scan format, can be set to  
the most frequently used modes. These settings are only  
available when you scan to the USB flash drive.  
1
Make sure that the USB flash drive is inserted into the USB  
port in the front of the machine. If necessary, insert the  
USB flash drive. See page 10.2.  
2
Press Scan-to on the control panel.  
The first available menu, item “USB Memory,appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
3
Press Enter. The display shows the available memory  
space for about 2 seconds and the first available menu  
item, “Auto Scan,appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Default-Change”  
appears on the bottom line of the display.  
Press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “Scan Size,appears on the  
bottom line.  
6
7
Press Enter.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) and select the size of the  
image to be scanned.  
8
9
Press Enter to make your selection.  
Press the button to scroll to “Scan Format” and press  
Enter to access the menu.  
10 Press the scroll button ( or ) and select the file format in  
which the document is to be scanned. You can select BMP,  
TIFF, PDF, or JPEG.  
10.6  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11 Press Enter.  
12 If you selected “BMP” in step 10, you are asked to select a  
color format, Color, Gray, or Mono, by pressing the scroll  
button ( or ).  
If you selected “PDF” in step 10, you are asked to select a  
color format, Color, or Mono, by pressing the scroll button  
( or ). You can save a multiple-page document as a  
single file, the machine displays “Multi Page” and offers you  
the choice of “On” or “Off.If you select “On” you can save  
multiple pages as a single file, but this feature is only  
activated when you load your document into the ADF. The  
ADF can handle documents of up to 50 pages at a time.  
If you selected “TIFF” in step 10, you can save a multiple-  
page document as a single file. After you select “TIFF, the  
machine displays “Multi Page” and offers you the choice of  
“On” or “Off.If you select “On” you can save multiple  
pages as a single file, but this feature is only activated  
when you load your document into the ADF. The ADF can  
handle documents of up to 50 pages at a time.  
13 Press Enter to make your selection.  
14 To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear.  
Deleting an Image File  
To delete an image file that you scanned and saved on the USB  
flash drive:  
1
Make sure that the USB flash drive is inserted into the USB  
port in front of the machine. If necessary, insert the USB  
flash drive. See page 10.2.  
2
Press Scan-to on the control panel.  
The first available menu item, “USB Memory,appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
3
Press Enter. The display shows the available memory  
space for about 2 seconds and the first available menu  
item, “Auto Scan,appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
10  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE 10.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “File Manage”  
on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “Delete,appears on the  
bottom line of the display.  
5
6
Press Enter.  
Press the scroll button( or ) until you find the folder or  
file you want and then press Enter  
.
If you see “D” in the front of a folder name, there are one  
or more folders in the selected folder.  
7
If you selected a file in step 6, the display shows the size of  
the file for about 2 seconds. Go to the next step.  
If you selected a folder, the first file contained in that folder  
appears on the bottom line of the display. You can view the  
other files in the folder by pressing the scroll button ( or  
). When you find the file you want to delete, press Enter  
.
The display shows the size of the file for about 2 seconds.  
8
9
When the display asks you to confirm your selection, select  
“Yes” to delete the folder or file.  
To cancel your selection, select “No” by pressing the scroll  
button ( or ).  
After deleting, the display asks if you want to delete  
another folder or file. Select “Yes” to delete more items,  
and repeat from step 6.  
Otherwise, select “No” by pressing the scroll button ( or  
).  
Formatting the USB Flash Drive  
1
Make sure that the USB flash drive is inserted into the USB  
port in the front of the machine. If necessary, insert the  
USB flash drive. See page 10.2.  
2
Press Scan-to on the control panel.  
The first available menu item, “USB Memory,appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
3
Press Enter. The display shows the available memory  
space for about 2 seconds and the first available menu  
10.8  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
item, “Auto Scan,appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
4
5
6
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “File Manage”  
on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Format” on  
the bottom line and press Enter  
.
When the display asks you to confirm your selection, select  
“Yes” to format the USB flash drive.  
To cancel your selection, select “No” by pressing the scroll  
button ( or ).  
Viewing the USB Memory Status  
You can check the amount of memory space available for  
scanning and saving documents.  
1
Make sure that the USB flash drive is inserted into the USB  
port in the front of the machine. If necessary, insert the  
USB flash drive. See page 10.2.  
2
Press Scan-to on the control panel.  
The first available menu item, “USB Memory,appears on  
the bottom line of the display.  
3
Press Enter. The display shows the available memory  
space for about 2 seconds and the first available menu  
item, “Auto Scan,appears on the bottom line of the  
display.  
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Check Space”  
on the bottom line and press Enter  
The available memory space appears on the display.  
To return to the Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
.
10  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE 10.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing From the USB Flash Drive  
You can directly print files stored on the USB flash drive. You can  
print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.  
Direct Print option supports:  
• PRN : Samsung PCL6 Compatible  
• BMP : BMP Uncompressed  
• TIFF : TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
Copyright  
Copyright  
©
©
1988-1997, Sam Leffler  
1991-1997, Silicon Graphics, Inc.  
• JPEG : JPEG Baseline  
Copyright© 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane  
PRN files can be created by selecting Print when your file is  
open, selecting your machine in the Name section of the Print  
window, and then selecting the Print to file check box. Save the  
newly made PRN file to the USB flash drive. Only PRN files  
created in this fashion can be printed directly from the USB flash  
drive to the machine.  
1
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port in the front of  
your machine. For details, see page 10.2.  
You can also press DIRECT PRINT without installing the  
USB flash drive.  
Your machine automatically detects the USB flash drive and  
reads data stored on it.  
2
3
Press the scroll button ( or ) to select the folder or file  
you want to print and press Enter  
.
If you see “D” in the front of a folder name, there are one  
or more folders in the selected folder.  
If you selected a file in step 2, go to the next step.  
If you selected a folder in step 2, the first file name in the  
folder appears on the bottom line of the display. You can  
also view the other files in the folder by pressing the scroll  
button ( or ). When you find the file that you want to  
print, go to step 4.  
4
To print the selected file, press Enter  
PRINT  
,
Start, or DIRECT  
.
If you selected a TIFF, BMP, or JPEG file in step 2, you  
can select the number of copies to be printed by pressing  
the scroll button ( or ) or entering the number using the  
numeric keys. Then press Enter to print the file.  
10.10  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print  
another job. Select “Yes” to print anther jobs, and repeat  
from step 2. Otherwise, select “No.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
Backing Up Data  
Your data in the machine’s memory are accidentally erased due  
to power failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect  
your Phonebook entries (SCX-4720F/4720FS only) and the  
system settings by storing them as backup files on the USB flash  
drive.  
To back up the data:  
1
2
Insert the USB flash drive. For details, see page 10.2.  
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
3
4
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Export  
Setting” on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
If you want to back up the Phonebook entries, when  
“Phonebook” appears on the bottom line, press Enter  
.
If you want to back up the system settings of the machine,  
select “All Settings” by pressing the scroll button ( or )  
and press Enter  
.
5
6
The data is backed up in the USB flash drive.  
If the file name is already stored on the USB flash drive,  
you are asked to overwrite it. Select “Yes” to overwrite the  
data.  
10  
Otherwise, select “No” by pressing the scroll button  
( or ).  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
USING USB FLASH DRIVE 10.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To restore the data:  
1
2
Insert the USB flash drive. For details, see page 10.2.  
Press Menu until “Machine Setup” appears on the top line  
of the display.  
3
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see “Import  
Setting” on the bottom line and press Enter  
.
Select the data type you want to restore, either  
“Phonebook” or “All Settings” and press Enter  
.
Select the file you want to restore and press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “Yes,appears on the bottom  
line.  
6
7
Press Enter to restore the backup file to the machine.  
To return to Standby mode, press Stop/Clear  
.
10.12  
USING USB FLASH DRIVE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USING YOUR MACHINE IN  
LINUX  
A
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.  
This chapter includes:  
• Getting Started  
• Installing the MFP Driver  
• Using the MFP Configurator  
• Configuring Printer Properties  
• Printing a Document  
• Scanning a Document  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
The supplied CD-ROM provides you with Samsung’s MFP driver  
package for using your machine with a Linux computer.  
Samsung’s MFP driver package contains printer and scanner  
drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan  
images. The package also delivers powerful applications for  
configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned  
documents.  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver  
package allows you to monitor a number of MFP devices via fast  
ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously. The acquired  
documents can then be edited, printed on the same local MFP or  
network printers, sent by e-mail, uploaded to an FTP site, or  
transferred to an external OCR system.  
The MFP driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible  
installation program. You don't need to search for additional  
components that might be necessary for the MFP software: all  
required packages will be carried onto your system and installed  
automatically; this is possible on a wide set of the most popular  
Linux clones.  
A.2  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
Installing the MFP Driver  
System Requirements  
Supported OS  
• Redhat 7.1 and above  
• Linux Mandrake 8.0 and above  
• SuSE 7.1 and above  
• Caldera OpenLinux 3.1 and above  
Turbo Linux 7.0 and above  
• Slackware 8.1 and above  
Recommended Hardware Requirements  
• Pentium IV 1 GHz or higher  
• RAM 256 MB or higher  
• HDD 1 GB or higher  
NOTES  
:
• It’s also necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  
working with large scanned images.  
• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  
maximum. see “Scanner and Copier Specifications” on page F.3.  
Software  
• Linux Kernel 2.4 or higher  
• Glibc 2.2 or higher  
• CUPS  
• SANE  
A.3  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installing the MFP Driver  
1
2
Make sure that you connect your machine to your  
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.  
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer  
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will  
automatically run.  
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal  
screen appears, type in:  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh  
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you have an  
autorun software package installed and configured.  
4
Click Install.  
A.4  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
A
6
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
The installation program has added the MFP Configurator  
desktop icon and Samsung MFP group to the system menu  
for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult  
the onscreen help that is available through your system  
menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package  
windows applications, such as MFP Configurator or Image  
Editor.  
A.5  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling the MFP Driver  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer  
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
2
Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will  
automatically run.  
If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal  
screen appears, type in:  
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux  
[root@localhost root]#./install.sh  
NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you have an  
autorun software package installed and configured.  
1
2
Click Uninstall  
.
Click Next  
.
3
Click Finish.  
A.6  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A
Using the MFP Configurator  
MFP Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring MFP  
devices. Since an MFP device combines the printer and scanner,  
the MFP Configurator provides options logically grouped for  
printer and scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port  
option responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer  
and scanner via a single I/O channel.  
After installing the MFP driver (see page A.3), the MFP  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
Opening the MFP Configurator  
1
Double-click MFP Configurator on the desktop.  
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select  
Samsung MFP and then MFP Configurator  
.
2
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the  
corresponding configuration window.  
Printers Configuration button  
Scanners Configuration button  
MFP Ports Configuration button  
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help  
.
3
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the  
MFP Configurator.  
A.7  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printers Configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs; Printers and Classes  
.
Printers Tab  
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by  
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the MFP  
Configurator window.  
Switches to Printer  
configuration.  
Printer control  
buttons. See  
below.  
Shows all of the  
installed printer.  
Shows the status,  
model name and  
URI of your printer.  
You can use the following printer control buttons:  
Refresh: renews the available printers list.  
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.  
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.  
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default printer.  
Stop Start: stops/starts the printer.  
/
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the machine  
is working properly.  
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer  
properties. For details, see page A.11.  
A.8  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Classes Tab  
A
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.  
Renews the classes list.  
Allows you to add a new  
printer class.  
Shows all of the  
printer classes.  
Removes the selected  
printer class.  
Shows the status of the  
class and the number of  
printers in the class.  
Scanners Configuration  
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,  
view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device  
properties, and scan images.  
Allows you to change the  
scan properties and scan a  
document. See page A.14.  
Switches to  
Scanners  
configuration.  
Allows you to monitor the  
Shows all of the  
activity of the scan  
installed scanners.  
drivers.  
Shows the vendor,  
model name and type of  
your scanner.  
A.9  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MFP Ports Configuration  
In this window, you can view the list of available MFP ports,  
check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled  
in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason.  
Renews the available  
ports list.  
Releases the selected  
port.  
Switches to  
MPF ports  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
available ports.  
Shows the port type,  
device connected to  
the port and status  
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners  
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the  
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more  
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to  
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these  
devices via the single I/O port.  
The Samsung MFP driver package provides an appropriate port  
sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and  
scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called  
MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via  
the MFP Ports Configuration. The port sharing prevents you from  
accessing one functional block of the MFP device, while another  
block is in use.  
When you install a new MFP printer onto your system, it is  
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an MFP  
Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port  
for the new device. This choice will provide the most suitable  
configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports  
are being chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper  
settings are applied by default.  
A.10  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
Configuring Printer Properties  
Using the properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your  
machine as a printer.  
1
Open the MFP Configurator.  
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
2
3
Select your machine on the available printers list and click  
Properties  
.
The Printer Properties window opens.  
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the  
printer list in Printers configuration.  
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice  
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port  
in this tab.  
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default  
device options.  
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to  
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed  
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click  
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or  
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the  
selected class.  
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer  
Properties Window.  
A.11  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing a Document  
Printing from Applications  
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print  
from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can  
print on your machine from any such application.  
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the  
File menu.  
2
3
Select Print directly using lpr  
.
In the Samsung LPR window, select the model name of  
your machine from the Printer list and click Properties  
.
Click.  
4
Change the printer and print job properties.  
A.12  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.  
A
General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper  
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the  
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes  
the number of pages per sheet.  
Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the  
text options, such as spacing or columns.  
Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used  
when printing images/files, such as color options, image  
size, or image position.  
Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper  
source, and destination.  
5
Click OK to apply the changes and close the scx4x20  
Properties window.  
6
7
Click OK in the Samsung LPR window to start printing.  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the  
status of your print job.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel  
.
Printing Files  
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung MFP  
device using the standard CUPS way - directly from the  
command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do that.  
But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much  
more user-friendly Samsung LPR program.  
To print any document file:  
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line  
and press Enter. The Samsung LPR window appears.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s)  
to print window appears first. Just select any files you want  
to print and click Open  
.
2
3
In the Samsung LPR window, select your printer from the  
list, and change the printer and print job properties.  
For details about the properties window, see page A.12.  
Click OK to start printing.  
A.13  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Scanning a Document  
You can scan a document using the MFP Configurator window.  
1
2
3
Double-click the MFP Configurator on your desktop.  
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
Select the scanner on the list.  
Click your  
scanner.  
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to  
the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the  
list and is automatically selected.  
If you have two or more scanners attached to your  
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any time.  
For example, while acquisition is in progress on the first  
scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the device  
options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.  
NOTE: The scanner name shown in Scanners configuration can be  
different from the device name.  
4
Click Properties.  
A.14  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the  
document glass. For details, see page 7.6.  
A
For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document,  
see page 5.3.  
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.  
The document is scanned and the image preview appears  
in the Preview Pane.  
Drag the pointer to  
set the image area  
to be scanned.  
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan  
Area sections.  
Image Quality: allows you to select the color  
composition and the scan resolution for the image.  
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The  
Advanced button enables you to set the page size  
manually.  
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,  
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about  
the preset Job Type settings, see page A.16.  
You can restore the default setting for the scan options by  
clicking Default  
.
8
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.  
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to  
show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,  
click Cancel  
.
A.15  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
The scanned image appears in the new Image Editor  
window.  
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. For  
further details about editing an image, see page A.17.  
10 When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.  
11 Select the file directory where you want to save the image  
and enter the file name.  
12 Click Save.  
Adding Job Type Settings  
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later  
scanning.  
To save a new Job Type setting:  
1
2
3
4
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.  
Click Save As  
Enter the name for your setting.  
Click OK  
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.  
.
.
A.16  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:  
A
1
2
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-  
down list.  
Click Save  
.
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,  
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan job.  
To delete a Job Type setting:  
1
2
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
Click Delete  
.
The setting is deleted from the list  
Using the Image Editor  
The Image Editor window provides you with menu commands  
and tools to edit your scanned image.  
Use these tools to  
edit the image.  
You can use the following tools to edit the image:  
Tools  
Function  
Saves the image.  
A.17  
LINUX  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
I
N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tools  
Function  
Cancels your last action.  
Restores the action you canceled.  
Allows you to scroll through the image.  
Crops the selected image area.  
Zooms the image out.  
Zooms the image in.  
Allows you to scale the image size; you can enter  
the size manually, or set the rate to scale  
proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.  
Allows you to rotate the image; you can select the  
number of degrees from the drop-down list.  
Allows you to flip the image vertically or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of  
the image, or to invert the image.  
Shows the properties of the image.  
For further details about the Image Editor program, refer to the  
onscreen help.  
A.18  
USING YOUR MACHINE  
IN  
LINUX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USING WINDOWS  
POSTSCRIPT DRIVER  
(SCX-4520S/4720FS Only)  
B
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your  
system CD-ROM to print a document, use the information in  
this Appendix.  
This chapter includes:  
• Installing PostScript Drivers  
• Using PostScript Printer Driver Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing PostScript Drivers  
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer  
features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
printer. An installation programme for the PPDs is provided on  
the supplied software CD-ROM.  
Before installing, make sure that the machine and the PC are  
properly connected with parallel, USB, or network interface. For  
information about:  
• connecting with a USB interface, see page 2.12.  
• connecting with a network interface, see page E.9. You need  
to install an optional network interface card; see “Installing a  
Network Interface Card” on page E.6.  
Installing PostScript Drivers  
NOTES  
:
• For Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, the system administrator should  
install the software.  
• Cancel the “New Hardware Found” window that appears when  
your computer boots up.  
• Make sure that your machine is turned on and connected to your  
computer’s parallel port or USB port before installing  
software. Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 do not support the  
USB connection.  
1
Insert the supplied PostScript driver CD-ROM into your CD-  
ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:Setup.exe, replacing “  
of your drive and click OK  
X” with the letter  
.
B.2  
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER (SCX-4520S/4720FS Only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
NOTE: If your machine is not already connected to the computer,  
when the following window opens, connect your machine to the  
computer and turn the machine on. Then click Next  
.
B
If the machine is already connected and turned on, this screen will  
not appear. Skip to the next step.  
2
Click Typical.  
3
4
Click Next  
.
When the installation is complete, click Finish  
.
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER (SCX-4520S/4720FS Only) B.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repairing PostScript Drivers  
1
2
From the Strat menu, select Programs.  
Select Samsung SCX-4x20 Series, and then  
Maintenance  
.
3
4
5
Click Repair  
Click Printer[PostScript] and then click Next  
When the repair is complete, click Finish  
.
.
.
Removing PostScript Drivers  
1
2
From the Strat menu, select Programs.  
Select Samsung SCX-4x20 Series, and then  
Maintenance  
.
3
4
5
6
Click Remove  
Click Printer[PostScript] and then click Next  
Click Yes  
When removal is complete, click Finish  
.
.
.
.
B.4  
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER (SCX-4520S/4720FS Only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using PostScript Printer Driver  
Features  
B
The machine automatically switches between PostScript and PCL  
printer languages, depending on the driver you have selected.  
Accessing Printer Properties  
The properties window for the Windows PostScript printer driver  
can be opened from the Printers folder or from an application.  
To open the properties window from the Printers folder:  
1
2
Click the Windows Start button.  
For Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings then  
Printers to open the Printers window.  
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes  
Select Samsung SCX-4x20 Series PS  
.
3
4
.
Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and:  
• In Windows 95/98/Me, select Properties  
• In Windows 2000/XP, select Printing Preferences  
• In Windows NT 4.0, select Document Default  
.
.
.
To open the properties window from an application:  
1
2
From the File menu, select Print to open the Print window.  
Make sure that Samsung SCX-4x20 Series PS is selected  
on the Name drop-down list.  
3
Click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print  
window to open the properties window.  
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER (SCX-4520S/4720FS Only) B.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printer Settings  
The printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This chapter shows the Printing Preferences  
window displayed on Windows XP.  
Your printer’s Printing Preferences window consists of 2 tabs:  
Layout and Paper/Quality  
.
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view additional Windows-based tabs; refer to your Windows  
User’s Guide.  
Layout tab  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. See page B.5 for more information  
on accessing printer properties.  
1
2
3
4
Property  
Description  
Orientation allows you to select the  
direction in which information is printed  
on a page.  
1
Orientation  
Portrait prints across the width of  
the page, letter style.  
Landscape prints across the length  
of the page, spreadsheet style.  
If you want to turn the page upside  
down, select Rotated Landscape  
.
B.6  
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER (SCX-4520S/4720FS Only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Property  
Description  
Page Order: You can set the sequence  
for the pages to print.  
2
Page Order  
Front to Back: Your machine prints  
all pages from the first page to the  
last page.  
B
Back to Front: Your machine prints  
all pages from the last page to the  
first page.  
Pages Per Sheet allows you to select  
the number of pages you want to print  
per sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) on the  
3
4
Pages Per  
Sheet  
You can use advanced settings by  
clicking the Advanced button. For  
details about these options, see  
Chapter 4,“Printing Tasks”.  
Advanced  
Paper/Output:This option allows  
you to select the size of the paper  
loaded in the tray.  
Graphic: This option allows you to  
adjust the print quality for your  
specific printing needs.  
Document Options: This options  
allow you to set the PostScript  
options or printer features, such as  
toner save mode and image mode.  
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER (SCX-4520S/4720FS Only) B.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper/Quality tab  
The Paper/Quality tab allows you to select the paper tray you  
will use for the print job.  
1
Property  
Description  
Make sure that Paper Source is set to  
the appropriate paper tray.  
1
Tray Selection  
Use the Manual Feed source when  
printing on special material. You need  
to load one sheet at a time into the  
Multipurpose tray. See page 3.8.  
If you install an optional Tray 2 and set  
Tray 2 in printer properties (see  
page E.13), you can select Tray2  
.
If the paper source is set to  
Automatically Select, the machine  
automatically picks up print material in  
the following order: the Multipurpose  
tray, Tray 1, and optional Tray 2.  
B.8  
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER (SCX-4520S/4720FS Only)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINTING FROM A  
MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY)  
C
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in  
USB interface or an optional 10/100 Base-TX network  
interface card. When you print a file from a Macintosh  
PPD file.  
This chapter includes:  
• Installing Software for Macintosh  
• Setting Up the Machine  
• Printing a Document  
• Using Advanced Printing Features  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing Software for Macintosh  
The PostScript driver CD-ROM that came with your machine  
provides you with the PPD file to use the PS driver, Apple  
LaserWriter driver, for printing on a Macintosh computer.  
Refer to the table below for the driver available for your  
machine.  
Your Machine Available Driver  
Connection  
Mac OS 8.6~9.2  
SCX-4520S/  
Network interface  
4720FS  
Mac OS 10.1 ~  
USB interface,  
Network interface  
NOTE: To use your printer with Mac OS 8.6 ~ 9.2, you first need  
to install an optional network interface card; see “Installing a  
Network Interface Card” on page E.6.  
Verify the following before you install the software:  
Item  
Requirements  
Operating system  
Mac OS 8.6 ~ 9.2/10.1~ 10.3  
Mac OS 8.6~9.2  
Mac OS 10.1 ~ 10.3  
200 MB  
64 MB  
128 MB  
RAM  
1
Connect your machine to the computer using the USB cable  
or the Ethernet cable. For details, see page 2.12 and  
page E.9.  
2
3
Turn on your computer and the machine.  
Insert the PostScript driver CD-ROM which came with your  
machine into the CD-ROM drive.  
4
5
Double-click the Samsung_MFP on your Macintosh  
desktop.  
Double-click the Installer folder.  
C.2  
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
For Mac OS 8.6~9.3, double-click the Samsung_MFP  
Installer Classic icon.  
For Mac OS 10.1~10.3, double-click the Samsung_MFP  
Installer OSX icon.  
7
8
9
Click Continue  
Click Install  
After the installation is finished, click Quit  
.
.
C
.
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY) C.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up the Machine  
The way to set up your machine is different depending on which  
cable you use to connect the machine to your computer-the  
network cable or the USB cable.  
For a Network-connected Macintosh  
Mac OS 8.6 ~ 9.2  
1
Follow the instructions on page C.2 to install the PPD file on  
your computer.  
2
3
From the Apple menu, select Chooser  
.
Click LaserWriter 8 (the PostScript driver provided with  
your Macintosh).  
The name of your machine appears on the list.  
4
Select SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box (where  
the xxxxxxxxx varies depending on each of the machines)  
and Click Select  
.
If Auto Setup does not work properly, click Select PPD  
,
choose Samsung SCX-4x20 Series, and click OK  
.
5
When the setup is complete, you see your machine icon  
created as a desktop printer.  
6
7
Close the Chooser  
.
When a message window appears telling you that you have  
changed your current machine, click OK  
Mac OS 10.1 ~ 10.3  
1
Follow the instructions on page C.2 to install the PPD file on  
your computer.  
2
3
Open Print Center from the Utilities folder.  
Click Add on the Printer List.  
C.4  
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Select the AppleTalk tab.  
The name of your machine appears on the list. Select  
SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the  
xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.  
5
6
Click Add.  
If Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in  
Printer Model and SCX-4x20 Series in Model Name.  
C
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
For a USB-connected Macintosh  
Mac OS 10.1 ~ 10.3  
1
Follow the instructions on page C.2 to install the PPD file on  
your computer.  
2
3
4
5
6
Open Print Center from the Utilities folder.  
Click Add on the Printer List.  
Select the USB tab.  
Select SCX-4x20 Series and click Add  
.
If Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in  
Printer Model and SCX-4x20 Series in Model Name.  
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY) C.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing a Document  
When you print with a Macintosh computer, you need to check  
the printer software setting in each application you use. Follow  
these steps to print from a Macintosh computer:  
NOTE: The LaserWriter driver’s window may be different  
depending on the version of your Macintosh system, but the  
features available are the same.  
1
2
3
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want  
to print.  
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document  
Setup in some applications).  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other  
options and click OK  
.
Mac OS 10.3  
4
5
Open the File menu and click Print.  
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which  
pages you want to print.  
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.  
C.6  
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Canceling a Print Job  
To cancel a print job, press the Stop/Clear button on the  
control panel. The machine finishes printing the page that is  
moving through the machine and deletes the rest of the print  
job.  
C
- Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper  
- Scheduling a Print Job  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of  
Paper  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.  
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
menu.  
Select the Layout  
.
Mac OS 10.3  
3
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet  
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.  
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY) C.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
5
Select the page order on the Layout Direction option.  
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select the  
option you want on the Border drop-down list.  
Click Print and the machine prints the selected number of  
pages on one side of each page.  
Scheduling a Print Job  
You can set your machine to print a job at a future time.  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
menu.  
Select Scheduler  
.
Mac OS 10.3  
3
Select the time when you want the print job to be printed.  
Now: The machine prints a job immediately.  
At: The machine prints a job at the time you set in the  
field.  
On hold: The machine holds a print job in the print  
queue until you are ready to release it.  
4
5
Select a priority for your print job on the Priority drop-  
down list.  
Click Print  
.
C.8  
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH (SCX-4520S/4720FS ONLY)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USING YOUR MACHINE ON  
A NETWORK  
D
be shared by other users on the network.  
This chapter includes:  
• About Sharing the Machine on a Network  
• Setting Up a Locally-Shared Machine  
NOTE: Before using your machine on a network, you need to  
install an optional network interface card. For more  
information, see Appendix E, "Installing a Network Interface  
Card".  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About Sharing the Machine on a  
Network  
If you work in a networked environment, you can connect your  
machine to the network.  
Locally-Shared Machine  
You can connect the machine directly to a selected computer,  
which is called the “host computer” on the network. The  
machine can then be shared by other users on the network  
through a Windows 9x/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP network printer  
connection.  
Wired Network-connected Machine  
To use the machine as a network printer, you need to install an  
optional network interface card in your machine. See page E.6  
for information about installing the card.  
Wireless Network-connected Machine  
To use your machine in a wireless network environment, you  
need to install an optional wired/wireless network interface card  
in your machine. See page E.6.  
Printing Across a Network  
Whether the machine is locally-connected or network-  
connected, you need to install the SCX-4x20 Series printer  
software on each computer that prints documents using the  
machine.  
D.2  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up a Locally-Shared  
Machine  
In Windows 95/98/Me  
Setting Up the Host Computer  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu, select Control Panel from Settings  
and double-click on the Network icon.  
D
3
4
Check the File and Print Sharing box, and click OK. Close  
the window.  
From the Start menu, select Printers from Settings and  
double-click your machine name.  
5
6
Select Properties in the Printer menu.  
Click the Sharing tab and check the Shared As box. Fill in  
the Shared Name field and click OK  
.
Setting Up the Client Computer  
1
2
3
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explorer  
.
Open your network folder in the left column.  
Right-click the shared name and select Capture Printer  
Port  
.
4
Select the port you want, check the Reconnect at log on  
box, and click OK  
.
5
6
7
8
From the Start menu, select Settings and then Printers.  
Double-click your machine icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Properties  
.
From the Details tab, select the printer port and click OK  
.
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK D.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
In Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP  
Setting Up the Host Computer  
1
2
Start Windows.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000, from the Start menu, select  
Settings and then Printers  
.
For Windows XP, from the Start menu, select Printers and  
Faxes  
.
3
4
5
Double-click your machine icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Sharing  
.
For Windows NT 4.0, check the Shared box.  
For Windows 2000, check the Shared As box.  
For Windows XP, check the Share this printer box.  
6
Fill in the Shared Name field and click OK.  
Setting Up the Client Computer  
1
2
3
4
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explorer  
.
Open your network folder in the left column.  
Click the shared name.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000, from the Start menu, select  
Settings and Printers  
.
For Windows XP, from the Start menu, select Printers and  
Faxes  
.
5
6
7
8
Double-click your machine icon.  
From the Printer menu, select Properties  
.
From the Ports tab, click Add Port  
.
Select Local port and click New Port  
.
D.4  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9
In the Enter a port name field, enter the shared name.  
10Click OK and click Close.  
11For Windows NT 4.0, click OK.  
For Windows 2000/XP, click Apply and click OK  
.
D
Setting Up a Network-Connected  
Machine  
You have to set up the network protocols on the machine to use  
it as your network printer. Setting protocols can be  
accomplished by using the supplied network program. Please  
refer to the SyncThru User’s Guide.  
You can configure the basic network parameters through the  
machine’s control panel. Use the machine’s control panel to do  
the following:  
• Print a Network Configuration Page  
• Enable or disable network protocols (IPX/SPX)  
• Configure TCP/IP  
• Configure IPX frame types  
Configuring Network Parameters on the  
Control Panel  
Supported Operating Systems  
NOTE: The operating systems supported by the network card may  
be different from the operating systems supported by the machine.  
The following table shows the network environments supported by  
the machine.  
Item  
Requirements  
Network Interface  
10/100 Base-TX or 802.11b Wireless  
LAN  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK D.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Item  
Requirements  
Network Operating  
System  
• Novell Netware 4.x, 5.x, 6.x  
• Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP  
• Unix AT&T, BSD4.3, HP-UX, SUN OS,  
SOLARIS, SCO  
• Various Linux OS  
• Macintosh OS 8.6~9.2, 10.1~10.3  
(SCX-4520S/4720FS only)  
Network Protocols  
• Netware IPX/SPX  
• TCP/IP, DLC/LLC on Windows  
• Port9100 on Unix, Linux  
Dynamic Addressing  
Server  
DHCP, BOOTP  
• IPX/SPX: Internet Packet eXchange/Sequenced Packet eXchange  
• TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol  
• DLC/LLC: Data Link Control/Logical Link Control  
• DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
• BOOTP: Bootstrap Protocol  
Printing a Network Configuration Page  
The Network Configuration page shows how the network  
interface card on your machine is configured. The default  
settings which are suitable for most applications are enabled.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Print Net CFG”  
displays on the bottom line.  
Press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “Yes,displays on the bottom  
line.  
4
Press Enter  
.
The Network Configuration page prints out.  
D.6  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Network Protocols  
When you first install the machine, all supported network  
protocols are enabled when you turn the machine on. If a  
network protocol is enabled, the machine may actively transmit  
on the network even when the protocol is not in use. This may  
increase network traffic slightly. To eliminate unnecessary  
traffic, you can disable unused protocols.  
1
2
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Config Network”  
displays on the bottom line.  
D
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the desired  
5
Press Enter.  
If you selected “TCP/IP,assign a TCP/IP address. For  
details, see page D.8.  
If you selected “EtherTalk,press the scroll button ( or )  
to change the setting to “On” (enable) or “Off” (disable).  
This menu is only available when you machine is SCX-  
4520S/4720FS.  
If you selected “NetWare, set the frame type format. For  
details, see page D.10.  
6
7
Press Enter to save the selection.  
Press Stop/Clear to return to Standby mode.  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK D.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring TCP/IP  
Your machine can be set up with a variety of TCP/IP networks  
information, such as an IP address, a Subnet Mask, and a  
Gatway. There are several ways in which your machine can be  
assigned a TCP/IP address, depending on your network.  
• Static Addressing: A TCP/IP address is assigned manually by  
the system administrator.  
• Dynamic Addressing BOOTP/DHCP (default): A TCP/IP  
address is assigned automatically by the server.  
NOTE: Before configuring the TCP/IP, you need to set network  
protocol to TCP/IP.  
Static Addressing  
To enter the TCP/IP address from your machine’s control panel,  
take the following steps:  
1
2
3
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Config Network”  
displays on the bottom line.  
Press Enter to access the menu.  
The first available menu item, “TCP/IP,appears on the  
bottom line.  
4
5
6
Press Enter.  
The first available menu item, “Manual,appears on the  
bottom line.  
Press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “IP Address,displays on the  
bottom line.  
Press Enter to access the IP Address menu.  
An IP address consists of 4 bytes.  
Enter a number between 0  
and 255 for each byte.  
D.8  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Press the scroll button ( or ) to enter a number between  
0 and 255 and press Enter or Upper Level to move  
between bytes.  
For the SCX-4720F/4720FS, you can enter a number using  
the number keypad and use the scroll button ( or ) to  
move between bytes.  
8
9
Repeat step 7 to complete the address from the 1st byte to  
the 4th byte.  
Press Enter  
.
D
10To select other parameters, such as a Subnet Mask or a  
Gateway, press the scroll button ( or ) until the desired  
item displays on the bottom line. Press Enter  
.
11Repeat steps 7 through 9 to configure the other TCP/IP  
parameters.  
12Press Stop/Clear to return to Standby mode.  
Dynamic Addressing (BOOTP/DHCP)  
To have the TCP/IP address assigned automatically by the  
server, take the following steps:  
1
2
3
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Config Network”  
appears on the bottom line.  
Press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “TCP/IP,appears on the  
bottom line.  
4
5
Press the scroll button ( or ) to display “DHCP” on the  
bottom line and press Enter  
.
To assign the address from the BOOTP server, press Enter  
when “BOOTP” displays on the bottom line.  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK D.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring IPX Frame Types  
On IPX/SPX protocol networks (for example, Novell NetWare),  
the format of the network communication frames must be  
specified for the machine. In most cases, you can keep the  
“Auto” default setting. However, you can manually set the frame  
type format, if required.  
Off: The IPX/SPX protocol is disabled.  
Auto (default): Automatically senses and limits the frame  
type to the first one detected.  
Enable 802.3: Limits the frame type to IPX over IEEE 802.3  
frames. All others will be discarded.  
Ethernet II: Limits the frame type to IPX over Ethernet  
Frames. All others will be discarded.  
Enable 802.2: Limits the frame type to IPX over IEEE 802.2  
with IEEE 802.3 frames. All others will be discarded.  
Enable SNAP: Limits the frame type to IPX over SNAP with  
IEEE 802.3 frames. All others will be discarded.  
Take the following steps to change the frame type format:  
1
2
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Config Network”  
displays on the bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “NetWare” displays on  
the bottom line. Press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “Off,displays on the bottom  
line.  
5
6
Press the scroll button ( or ) until you see the desired  
frame type and press Enter  
.
Press the Stop/Clear to return to Standby mode.  
D.10  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Restoring the Network Configuration  
You can return the network configuration to its default settings.  
1
2
3
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Set To Default”  
displays on the bottom line.  
Press Enter  
.
The first available menu item, “Yes,displays on the bottom  
line.  
D
4
5
Press Enter to restore the network configuration.  
Power the machine off and back on, or reboot the network  
interface card.  
Rebooting the Network Interface Card  
If you configured the “NetWare” or “802.11b” menu option, the  
machine will not recognize your change  
In this case, you can simply reboot the network interface card  
without turning your machine off and back on.  
1
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
The first available item, “Reset Network,displays on the  
bottom line.  
2
3
Press Enter.  
The first available menu item, “Yes,displays on the bottom  
line.  
Press Enter to reboot the network interface card.  
Configuring the Wireless Network  
See the instructions supplied with the optional wireless network  
interface card.  
Configure the wireless network environments.  
You can easily configure the wireless network environments  
using the SetIP program in Windows. See the Wireless Network  
User's Guide.  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK D.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To configure the wireless network settings:  
1
2
Press Menu until you see “Network Setup” on the top line  
of the display.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “Config Network”  
displays on the bottom line.  
3
4
Press Enter to access the menu.  
Press the scroll button ( or ) until “802.11b” displays on  
the bottom line. Press Enter  
.
You can configure the following items:  
SSID Type: When you select “Search List,the wireless  
network card on your machine searches for wireless networks  
in the area and displays the results on a list. Select a network  
from the list. You cannot change “Operation Mode” and  
“Channel.  
If you select “Custom, you can configure the wireless settings  
according to your needs and enter a name of up to 32 letters  
for your “Custom” setting. “SSID Type” is case sensitive, so  
you need to change it carefully. Using the Scroll buttons, find  
the alphabet you want and press the Enter. When the cursor  
moves to the next input field, enter the following letters the  
same way you entered the first letter. After you entered the  
last letter of the name, press the Enter once again to save the  
ID. The way to enter the key number for the encryption key is  
the same as entering letters.  
Operation Mode: “Ad-hoc” mode allows the wireless devices  
to communicate directly with each other. This is the default  
operating mode for the print server.  
If your network uses an Access Point, you must reconfigure  
the operation mode to “InfraStructure.InfraStructure” mode  
allows both wireless and cabled computers to send files to the  
machine through an Access Point.  
If you select “Auto,the print server selects the operation  
mode automatically, according to the network cable’s  
connection each time it boots up. If a network cable is  
detected, the print server enters “Ad-hoc” mode; if not, it  
enters “InfraStructure” mode.  
Channel: This option is available in the “Ad-hoc” mode only.  
In most cases, you will not need to change this setting. The  
print server will scan all available channels for the specified  
network and will adapt its channel to the one detected. The  
default setting is 10.  
D.12  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Authentication: “Open System” or “Shared Key.The “Open  
System” service is not configured for network authentication.  
If required by your network, the proper authentication  
method must be configured.  
Encryption: “No data Encryption, 64 bits, or “128 bits.  
Default setting is “No data Encryption. If your network uses  
WEP encryption keys, you must configure the encryption  
keys. You can configure up to four keys. The active key must  
match the value and active key position (for example, Key 1)  
configured on other wireless devices.  
-
-
-
Using Key: Select the key to use in your network.  
Key Type: Select the key type of your network.  
D
Key 1  
,
Key 2, Key 3, Key 4: Enter the key number for  
“Encryption.The numbers you can enter are as follows:  
Hexadecimal  
10 digits  
Alphanumeric  
5 characters  
64-bit WEP  
128-bit WEP  
26digits  
13 characters  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK D.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
D.14  
USING YOUR MACHINE ON A NETWORK  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLING MACHINE  
OPTIONS  
E
Your machine is a full-featured laser printer that has been  
optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing  
that each user may have different requirements, however,  
Samsung makes several options available to enhance your  
machine’s capabilities.  
This chapter includes:  
• Installing Memory DIMM  
• Installing a Network Interface Card  
• Installing an Optional Tray  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing Memory DIMM  
Your machine has dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use  
this DIMM slot to install more memory option for the machine.  
NOTE: Your machine has 32 MB of memory which can be  
expanded to 160 MB. Use only a Samsung-approved DIMM, part  
numbers ML-00MA (16 MB), ML-00MB (32 MB), ML-00MC (64 MB),  
or ML-00MD (128 MB). Contact your Samsung dealer.  
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling a  
DIMM, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the  
surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal  
on the machine.  
1
2
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the  
machine.  
Hold the control board cover and remove it.  
3
Completely open the latches on each side of the DIMM slot.  
E.2  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Remove the memory DIMM from its antistatic package.  
Locate the alignment notches on the bottom edge of each  
DIMM.  
Notches  
Connection  
points  
5
Holding the memory DIMM by the edges, align the notches  
on the memory DIMM with the grooves at the top of the  
memory DIMM slot.  
E
Groove  
Notch  
6
Push the DIMM straight into the DIMM slot until it snaps into  
place. Make sure the latches fit over the notches located on  
either side of the DIMM.  
Notch  
Latch  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS E.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Replace the control board cover.  
8
Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the  
machine on.  
NOTE: After installing the memory DIMM, you need to select it in  
the printer properties of the PostScript printer driver so that  
you can use it with your machine(SCX-4520S/4720FS  
):  
1. Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed in your  
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see  
page B.2.  
2. Click the Windows Start menu.  
3. For Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and then  
Printers  
.
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes  
.
4. Select the Samsung SCX-4x20 Series PS printer.  
5. Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select  
Properties  
.
6. For Windows 95/98/Me, select Device Options tab.  
For Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, select Device Settings tab.  
7. Select the memory DIMM you installed in from Printer  
Memory in the Installable Option section and click OK  
For Windows 98, select Installable Option VMOption  
change setting for:VMOption change memory  
.
.
E.4  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing a Memory DIMM  
1
2
Follow steps 1 through 2 on page E.2 to access the control  
board.  
Push the latches at both ends of the DIMM slot away from  
the DIMM. Pull out the DIMM.  
E
3
4
Place the DIMM in its original packaging or wrap it with a  
sheet of thin metal, such as aluminium foil, and store it in a  
box.  
Follow from step 7 on page E.4.  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS E.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing a Network Interface Card  
NOTE: When you purchase a wired/wireless network interface  
card, the antenna connected to the card may not be separated  
from the card, depending on your country.  
To use your machine on a network, your machine must be  
equipped with an optional network interface card.  
If you want to use the machine in both wired and wireless  
network environments, you need to install an optional wired/  
wireless network interface card.  
Check to see if there are any missing parts in your optional  
interface card package.  
Network Card options  
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX  
(Internal)  
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX +  
802.11b Wireless LAN (Internal)  
Order number: SCX-00NB  
Order number: SCX-00LA  
Network interface Card,  
Network Scan CD-ROM ,  
Wireless Network interface Card,  
Network Scan CD-ROM ,  
*
*
SyncThru CD-ROM and  
SyncThru Quick Guide  
SyncThru CD-ROM, SyncThru  
Quick Guide and Wireless Quick  
Guide  
*The Network Scan CD-ROM contains the Network Scan driver, the Network  
Scan User’s Guide, and the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. For installation  
about the Network Scan driver, see page 6.9.  
1
Turn the machine power off and unplug all cables from the  
machine.  
E.6  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Hold the control board cover and remove it.  
3
Remove the two screws and the bracket from the control  
board. You can discard the old bracket.  
E
If you are replacing an existing network interface card with  
a new one:  
Remove the two screws.  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS E.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reach in and grasp the network interface card by the left  
side corners. Gently pull on the card until it disengages.  
Move your hand to the center of the card and carefully  
maneuver it out of the machine.  
4
Align the connector on the network interface card with the  
connector on the control board. Make sure that the jacks on  
the card go through the holes. Push the card firmly into the  
connector on the control board until it is completely and  
securely in place.  
E.8  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Tighten the two screws.  
6
Replace the control board cover.  
E
7
Plug one end of the Ethernet cable (UTP cable with RJ.45  
connector) into the Ethernet network port on the machine  
and the other end of the cable into a network LAN  
connection.  
To the network LAN connection  
8
Reconnect the power cord and turn the machine on.  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS E.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE: For information about configuring and using the machine in  
a network environment, refer to the User’s Guide provided with the  
network interface card. You can also configure the network  
parameters using the control panel; see page D.5.  
Installing an Optional Tray  
You can increase the paper handling capacity of your machine  
by installing an optional Tray 2. This tray holds 250 sheets of  
paper.  
1
2
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the  
machine.  
Remove the packing material from the tray and remove the  
tape fixing the interface cable to the tray.  
3
Find the location of the connector and the optional tray  
positioners.  
E.10  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Place the machine over the tray, aligning the feet on the  
machine with the positioners on the tray.  
Lifting handles are  
located at the  
lower edge of both  
sides of the  
machine.  
E
5
Plug the interface cable of the tray into the connector on the  
back of the machine.  
6
Load paper in the tray. The instructions for loading paper in  
this tray are the same as for loading the standard paper  
tray. See page 2.7.  
7
8
After loading paper, you need to set the paper type and size  
for Tray 2. See page 2.20.  
Reconnect the power cord and cables and then turn the  
machine on.  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS E.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Tray 2 in the Printer Properties  
If you installed Tray 2 with your machine on, the machine does  
not recognize it. In this case, you need to set the tray in the  
printer properties window so that you can use it for PC printing.  
The procedure for setting the tray may differ depending on the  
selected printer driver.  
To set the tray in the printer properties of the PCL 6 printer  
driver:  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and  
then Printers  
.
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes  
.
3
4
5
Select the Samsung SCX-4x20 Series PCL 6 machine  
icon.  
Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select  
Properties  
.
Click the Printer tab, and select Tray 2 from the Optional  
Tray drop-down list.  
6
Click OK.  
E.12  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To set the tray in the printer properties of the PostScript printer  
driver (SCX-4520S/4720FS only).  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, select Settings and  
then Printers  
.
For Windows XP, select Printers and Faxes  
.
3
4
Select the Samsung SCX-4x20 Series PS machine icon.  
Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select  
Properties  
.
5
Click the Device Settings tab, and select Installed from  
the Tray2 drop-down list.  
E
6
Click OK.  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS E.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
E.14  
INSTALLING MACHINE OPTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIFICATIONS  
F
This chapter includes:  
• General Specifications  
• Scanner and Copier Specifications  
• Printer Specifications  
• Facsimile Specifications (For the SCX-4720F/  
4720FS  
)
• Paper Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Automatic document  
feeder  
Up to 50 sheets (20 lb, 75 g/m2)  
Width: 142 to 216 mm (5.6 to 8.5 inches)  
Length: 148 to 356 mm (5.8 to 14 inches)  
ADF document size  
Paper tray (standard Tray 1 and optional Tray 2): 250  
sheets (weight: 75 g/m2, 20 lb)  
Paper input capacity  
Multipurpose tray: 50 sheets for plain paper (weight: 75  
g/m2, 20 lb), 5 sheets for card stock, labels,  
transparencies, and envelopes  
Front output tray: 150 sheets (face down)  
Rear output slot: 1 sheet (face up)  
Paper output capacity  
Paper type  
Paper tray: Plain paper (60 ~ 90 g/m2, 16 ~ 24 lb)  
Multipurpose tray: Plain paper, Transparencies, Labels,  
Card, Post card, Envelopes (60 ~ 120 g/m2, 16 ~ 32 lb)  
Consumables  
1-piece toner cartridge system  
100 - 127 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5.0 A  
220 - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.6 A  
Power requirements  
Sleep mode: 30 W  
Average: 400 W  
Power consumption  
Noise*  
Standby mode: Less than 39 dBA  
Printing: Less than 54 dBA  
Copy: Less than 55 dBA  
Warm-up time  
Less than 42 seconds  
Temperature: 50 oF to 89 oF (10 oC to 32 oC)  
Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH  
Operating conditions  
LCD  
16 characters x 2 lines  
5,000 or 3,000 pages at ISO 19752 5 % coverage (Ships  
with 3,000 pages Start Toner Cartridge)  
Toner cartridge life**  
SET dimension  
(W x D x H)  
450 x 435 x 457 mm  
Net: 17 Kg (including consumables)  
Weight  
Gross: 21 Kg (including consumables, accessories and  
package)  
F.2  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Item  
Description  
Paper: 2.8 Kg  
Plastic: 0.7 Kg  
Package weight  
Print: Up to 15,000 pages  
Scan: Up to 1,000 pages  
ADF: Up to 1,000 pages  
Duty cycle (Monthly)  
*Sound Pressure Level, ISO7779  
**The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and me-  
dia size.  
Scanner and Copier Specifications  
Item  
Compatibility  
Description  
TWAIN standard  
ADF and Flat-bed Color CCD (Charge Coupled Device)  
module  
Scanning method  
Resolution  
F
Optical: 600 x 1200 dpi (Mono and color)  
Enhanced: 4,800 x 4,800 dpi (USB)  
Platen: 293 mm (11.5 in.)  
ADF: 356 mm (14 in.)  
Effective scanning length  
Effective scanning width  
Color bit depth  
Max. 208 mm (8.2 in.)  
24 bit  
1 bit for Text mode  
8 bit for Gray mode  
Mono bit depth  
Scan speed  
27 seconds (Text mode)  
75 seconds (Gray mode)  
150 seconds (Color mode)  
Letter: Up to 22 pages per minute  
A4: Up to 20 pages per minute  
Copy speed*  
Scan: 600 x 300 (Text, Mixed) / 600 x 600 (Photo)  
Print: 600 x 600 (Text, Mixed, Photo)  
Copy resolution  
Platen: 25 ~ 400 %  
ADF: 25 ~ 100 %  
Zoom rate  
Multiple copies  
1-99 pages  
F.3  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Item  
Description  
Gray scale  
128 levels  
*Copy Speed is based on Single Document Multiple Copy.  
Printer Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Printing method  
Printing speed*  
Laser Beam Printing  
Letter: Up to 22 PPM (pages per minutes)  
A4: Up to 20 PPM (pages per minutes)  
Standby mode: 10 seconds  
First printing time  
Power save mode: 50 seconds  
Paper tray: Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Executive, B5, A5  
Multipurpose tray: Letter, Legal, A4, Folio, Executive,  
A5, A6, Envelope 10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,  
Envelope C6, JIS B5, Monarch Envelope  
Paper size  
* Min.: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)  
Max.: 216 x 356 (8.5 x 14 in.)  
Printer resolution  
Emulation  
600 x 600 dpi (1200 x 600 dpi)  
PCL 6** Compatible, PostScript 3 (SCX-4520S/4720FS  
only)  
• PCL driver: Windows 95/98/2000/NT 4.0/Me/XP,  
• Various Linux OS (USB only)  
Printer drivers***  
• PostScript driver (SCX-4520S/4720FS only) :  
Windows 95/98/2000/NT 4.0/Me/XP, Macintosh OS  
8.6~9.2/10.1~10.3  
32 MB (Max. 160 MB)  
16, 32, 64, 128 MB optional memory available  
Use only the Samsung-approved DIMM.  
Memory  
16 MB: ML-00MA; 32 MB: ML-00MB; 64 MB: ML-00MC;  
128 MB: ML-00MD  
Inteface  
Options  
IEEE 1284 Parallel, USB 2.0  
Ethernet 10/100 Base TX (Internal), Ethernet 10/100  
Base TX + 802.11b Wireless LAN (Internal)  
*Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, con-  
necting method, media type, media size, and job complexity.  
F.4  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
**Compatible with PCL6 Version 2.1  
Facsimile Specifications (For the SCX-4720F/4720FS)  
Item  
Compatibility  
Description  
ITU-T Group 3  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind  
PABX  
Applicable line  
MH/MR/MMR (ECM Mode) and JPEG for color fax  
transmission  
Data coding  
Modem speed  
33.6 Kbps  
Approx. 3 seconds/page  
* Transmission time applies to memory transmission of  
text data with ECM compression using only ITU-T No.1  
Chart.  
Transmission speed  
F
Platen: 297 mm  
ADF: 400 mm  
Maximum document length  
Paper size  
Letter, A4, Legal  
Standard: 203 x 98 dpi  
Resolution  
Fine: 203 x 196 dpi  
Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi / 203 x 392 dpi  
User memory  
Halftone  
4 MB (320 pages)  
256 levels  
One-touch dialing (up to 40 numbers)  
Speed dialing (up to 200 numbers))  
Auto dialer  
F.5  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Specifications  
Overview  
Your machine accepts a variety of print materials, such as cut-sheet paper (including  
up to 100% recycled fiber content paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies and  
custom-size paper. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain and moisture  
content, are important factors affecting the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. Paper that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide can  
cause the following problems:  
• Poor print quality  
• Increased paper jams  
• Premature wear on the machine.  
NOTES  
:
• Some paper may meet all of the guidelines in this guide and still not produce  
satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable  
temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which Samsung has no  
control.  
• Before purchasing large quantities of paper, insure the paper meets the requirements  
specified in this user’s guide.  
CAUTION: Using paper that does not meet these specifications may cause problems,  
requiring repairs. These repairs are not covered by the Samsung warranty or service  
agreements.  
F.6  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supported Sizes of Paper  
Dimensions*  
Capacity**  
Paper  
Weight  
8.5 x 11 in.  
(216 x 279 mm)  
Letter  
A4  
210 x 297 mm  
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)  
7.25 x 10.5 in.  
(191 x 267 mm)  
Executive  
• 60 to 90 g/m2  
bond (16 to  
24 lb) for the  
paper tray  
• 60 to 163 g/m2  
bond (16 to  
43 lb) for the  
Multipurpose  
tray  
• 250 sheets of 75  
8.5 x 14 in.  
(216 x 356 mm)  
g/m2 bond (20  
lb) paper for the  
paper tray  
Legal  
216 x 330 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in.)  
Folio  
• 50 sheet of  
paper for the  
Multipurpose  
tray  
216 x 343 mm  
(8.5 x 13.5 in.)  
Oficio  
182 x 257 mm  
(7.2 x 10 in.)  
B5 (JIS)  
F
176 x 250 mm  
(6.7 x 9.9 in.)  
B5 (JIS)  
148 x 210 mm  
(5.8 x 8.2 in.)  
A5  
76 x 127 mm  
(3 x 5 in)  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size  
60 to 163 g/m2  
bond (16 to  
43 lb)  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in)  
5 sheets of paper  
for the  
Multipurpose tray  
138 to 148 g/m2  
120 to 150 g/m2  
60 to 163 g/m2  
60 to 90 g/m2  
Transparency  
Labels  
Same minimum  
and maximum  
paper sizes as  
listed above.  
Cards  
Envelopes  
*The machine supports a wide range of media sizes. See “Paper Type, Input Sources, and Capacities” on  
page 3.2.  
**Capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
NOTE: You may experience jams when using print materials with a length of less than  
127 mm (5 in.). For optimum performance, ensure that you are storing and handling the  
paper correctly. Please refer to “Paper Storage Environment” on page F.9.  
F.7  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Guidelines for Using Paper  
For the best result, use conventional 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. Ensure that the paper is  
of good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles,  
voids, and curled or bent edges.  
If you are unsure of what type of paper you are loading, such as bond or recycled  
paper, check the label on the package.  
The following problems may cause print quality deviations, jamming or even damage  
to the machine:  
Symptom  
Problem with Paper  
Solution  
Try another kind of paper,  
between 100 ~ 400  
Sheffield, 4 ~ 5 %  
Poor print quality or toner  
adhesion, problems with  
feeding  
Too moist, too rough, too  
smooth or embossed;  
faulty paper lot  
moisture content.  
Store paper flat in its  
moisture-proof wrapping.  
Dropout, jamming, curl  
Stored improperly  
Too heavy  
Increased gray background  
shading/printer wear  
Use lighter paper, use the  
rear output slot.  
Too moist, wrong grain  
direction or short-grain  
construction  
• Use the rear output slot.  
• Use long-grain paper.  
Excessive curl problems with  
feeding  
Jamming, damage to  
machine  
Do not use paper with  
cutouts or perforations.  
Cutouts or perforations  
Ragged edges  
Problems with feeding  
Use good quality paper.  
NOTES  
:
• Do not use letterhead paper printed with low-temperature inks, such as those used in  
some types of thermography.  
• Do not use raised or embossed letterhead.  
• The machine uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Insure that any colored  
paper or preprinted forms use inks that are compatible with this fusing temperature  
(200 °C or 392 °F for 0.1 second).  
F.8  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Specifications  
Category  
Acid content  
Specifications  
5.5 pH or lower  
Caliper  
0.094 ~ 0.18 mm (3.0 ~ 7.0 mils)  
Flat within 5 mm (0.02 in.)  
Curl in ream  
Cut edge conditions  
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray.  
Must not scorch, melt, offset or release hazardous  
emissions when heated to 200 °C (392 °F) for 0.1  
second.  
Fusing compatibility  
Grain  
Long grain  
Moisture content  
Smoothness  
4 % ~ 6 % by weight  
100 ~ 400 Sheffield  
F
Paper Output Capacity  
Output Location  
Capacity  
150 sheets of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper  
1 sheet of 75 g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper  
Face-down output tray  
Face-up output slot  
Paper Storage Environment  
Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.  
Ideally, the machine and paper storage environment should be at or near room  
temperature, and not too dry or humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it  
absorbs and loses moisture rapidly.  
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to  
evaporate, while cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air  
conditioners remove most of the humidity from a room. As paper is opened and used,  
it loses moisture, causing streaks and smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can  
cause the humidity to increase in a room. As paper is opened and used it absorbs any  
excess moisture, causing light print and dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains  
moisture it can become distorted. This can cause paper jams.  
Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be used in a short time  
(about 3 months). Paper stored for long periods may experience heat and moisture  
extremes, which can cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to  
large supplies of paper.  
F.9  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use.  
Opened packages of paper have more potential for environment damage, especially  
if they are not wrapped with a moisture-proof barrier.  
The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum  
performance. The required condition is 20 to 24 °C (68 to 75 °F), with a relative  
humidity of 45 % to 55 %. The following guidelines should be considered when  
evaluating the paper’s storage environment:  
• Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.  
• The air should not be too dry or too humid.  
• The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its  
moisture-proof wrapping. If the machine environment is subject to extremes,  
unwrap only the amount of paper to be used during the day’s operation to prevent  
unwanted moisture changes.  
Envelopes  
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only  
between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer.  
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When  
selecting envelopes, consider the following components:  
• Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90g/m2 (24lb) or  
jamming may occur.  
• Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6mm  
(0.25in.) curl, and should not contain air.  
• Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked or otherwise damaged.  
Temperature: You should use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and  
pressure of the machine.  
• Size: You should only use envelopes within the following size ranges.  
Minimum  
76 x 127 mm  
Maximum  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
Multipurpose tray  
(3 x 5 in.)  
NOTES  
• Use only the manual feeder to print envelopes.  
• You may experience some paper jams when using any media with a length less than  
140 mm 5.5 in.). This may be caused by paper that has been affected by  
:
(
environmental conditions. For optimum performance, make sure you are storing and  
handling the paper correctly. Please refer to “Paper Storage Environment” on page F.9.  
F.10  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Envelopes with Double Side Seams  
Double side-seams construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope  
rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure the  
seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as illustrated below.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to  
seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat and pressure in the machine. The  
extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing or even jams and may even  
damage the fuser.  
F
Envelope Margins  
The following gives typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.  
Type of Address  
Return address  
Minimum  
15 mm (0.6 in.)  
51 mm (2 in.)  
Maximum  
51 mm (2 in.)  
Delivery address  
90 mm (3.5 in.)  
NOTES  
:
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 in.) from the  
edges of the envelope.  
• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.  
Envelope Storage  
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be  
stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope  
may wrinkle during printing.  
F.11  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Labels  
CAUTIONS  
:
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels recommended for laser printers.  
To prevent serious jams, always use the manual feeder to print labels and always use  
the rear output tray.  
• Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once and never print on a partial  
sheet of labels.  
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:  
• Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 180°C (356°F), the  
machine’s fusing temperature.  
• Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can  
peel off sheets with spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.  
• Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13mm (5in.) of curl in  
any direction.  
• Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles or other indications of  
separation.  
Transparencies  
Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand 180°C (356°F), the  
machine’s fusing temperature.  
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies recommended for  
use in laser printers.  
F.12  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
connection  
Numerics  
telephone line cord 2.11  
A
adding documents 7.33  
load 5.5, 7.6  
copying  
automatic dialing  
group 7.23  
one-touch 7.19  
from ADF 5.5  
from document glass 5.4  
number of pages 5.9  
automatic redialing 7.13  
B
C
delayed fax 7.29  
DIMM  
installing E.2  
removing E.5  
display language, change 2.15  
copy 5.5  
print 4.3  
cleaning  
jam, clear 9.2  
loading  
document glass 5.4, 7.7  
outside 8.3  
cleaning 8.5  
scan unit 8.5  
loading 7.7  
clone, special copy 5.10  
collation, special copy 5.10  
components 1.5  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection) 7.17  
drum, clean 8.11  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
scanning A.14  
loading, paper  
E
error messages 9.12  
in the multipurpose tray 3.6  
using the manual feed 3.8  
extension phone, connect 2.11  
F
M
fax system, set  
basic settings 7.3  
fit to page  
common problems 9.32  
copying 5.11  
manual feed mode, use 3.8  
front output tray, use 3.10  
memory, clear 8.2  
Linux A.4  
G
graphic properties, set 4.8  
group dial  
dialing 7.25  
setting 7.23  
Macintosh C.2  
Windows 2.28  
PostScript B.2  
H
help, use 4.12  
I
locally shared printer, set D.3  
Network Scan 6.9  
notifying toner low 8.10  
n-up (multiple pages per sheet)  
copying 5.12  
installing  
Network Scan software 6.9  
optional Tray2 E.10  
PS driver B.2  
toner cartridge 2.5  
network interface card E.6  
paper tray 2 E.10  
orientation, print 4.5, A.13, B.6  
output location, select 3.10  
overlay, use 4.21  
J
jam, clear  
document 9.2  
L
Linux  
common problems 9.28  
driver, install A.4  
printer properties A.11  
printing A.12  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P
paper load  
paper feeding 9.16  
printing 9.17  
printing quality 9.19  
paper load capacity 3.2  
paper size, set  
paper tray 2.20  
paper source, set 4.7, A.13  
paper type, set  
print 4.7, A.13  
parallel, connect 3.7  
poster  
in DRPD mode 7.17  
in Tel mode 7.15  
redialing  
automatically 7.13  
printing 4.17  
replacing  
toner cartridge 8.8  
reports, print 7.36  
resolution  
PostScript driver  
installing B.2  
print resolution 4.8, A.13  
printer driver, install  
Windows 2.28  
PostScript B.2  
faxing 7.9  
Printer Settings Utility  
printing  
SmarThru 6.4  
multiple pages on one sheet 4.13  
Phonebook list 7.27  
posters 4.14  
reduced or enlarged document 4.17  
reports 7.36  
WIA driver 6.7  
searching Phonebook 7.26  
Secure Receiving mode 7.35  
sending a fax  
automatically 7.11  
manually 7.12  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sharing printer, set D.3  
SmarThru  
W
watermarks, use 4.18  
specifications  
facsimile F.5  
printer F.4  
storing 7.21  
system requirements  
Linux A.3  
T
tel line, connect 2.11  
toner cartridge  
installing 2.5  
maintaining 8.6  
redistributing 8.7  
replacing 8.8  
toner save mode, use 2.23  
U
uninstalling  
Linux A.6  
PostScript B.4  
USB  
USB flash drive  
installing 10.2  
managing 10.6  
printing 10.10  
V
volume, adjust  
ringer 2.21  
speaker 2.22  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

QSC Audio Speaker System WideLine Array User Guide
RCA CRT Television F27450, F32444, F32450, F36444, F36450 User Guide
RCA Telephone 2 9291 User Guide
ResMed Oxygen Equipment 62100 User Guide
Rosewill Computer Drive RNX B100 User Guide
Rotel Stereo Amplifier RSP 1570 User Guide
Samsung Printer SF 76xP Series User Guide
Samsung Projection Television HL R5678W User Guide
Sanyo Projector XP51L User Guide
Senco Staple Gun YK0314 User Guide